JP2020078709A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably suppressing giving a player unpleasant feeling due to generation of sound crack in sound output means.SOLUTION: In a pachinko machine, a sound light control device 72 is electrically connected to a main control device 71, and to the sound light control device 72, an upper side loudspeaker 91, a lower side loudspeaker 101, and a sound volume switch 111 are electrically connected. The sound volume switch 111 is configured to be switchable to a plurality of positions, and outputs a detection signal corresponding to the position to the sound light control device 72. The sound light control device 72 outputs a sound signal corresponding to the position of the sound volume switch 111 to the loudspeakers 91, 101 and due to an input of the sound signal from the sound light control device 72, the loudspeakers 91, 101 output a sound corresponding to a sound volume level of the sound signal. The sound light control device 72 is configured to be able to acquire a generation of sound crack in the output sound from the loudspeakers 91, 101.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a speaker as a sound output means, and the speaker outputs various effect sounds according to the gaming state, so that the degree of attention to the game can be increased. Further, since the output sound from the speaker is used as the notification sound, it becomes possible to notify the state of the gaming machine and the occurrence of fraud.

  The speaker outputs a sound when the sound signal is input from the amplifier, and the volume of the sound output from the speaker is determined by setting the amplification rate of the sound signal by the amplifier. In the gaming machine in which the amplification factor of the amplifier is variably set, it is possible to change the output volume from the speaker according to the amplification factor of the amplifier. For example, in a gaming machine provided with a volume switch, the amplification factor of the amplifier is changed by operating the volume switch, and thereby the output volume from the speaker is changed (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2005-261808, A

  However, when the volume level of the sound signal input to the speaker is higher than the allowable input level of the speaker, the sound output from the speaker may sound distorted due to distortion of the waveform of the sound signal. In this case, the output sound, which should improve the game playability and convenience, gives the player discomfort.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-illustrated circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can favorably prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the occurrence of sound cracks in the sound output means. It is what

The present invention is
Amplification means for amplifying the sound signal,
Sound output means for outputting a sound at a volume according to the volume level of the sound signal amplified by the amplification means,
Sound excess detection means capable of detecting that the volume level of the sound signal amplified by the amplification means exceeds a predetermined reference level,
Setting means capable of setting a predetermined set value from a plurality of predetermined values,
Reduction means for performing a level reduction process for reducing the volume level of the sound signal based on the detection of the oversound detection means,
A gaming machine equipped with
The reducing unit has an amplification factor limiting unit that reduces the amplification factor of the sound signal amplified by the amplification unit according to the setting of the setting unit,
The gaming machine is provided with a plurality of the sound output means, and the sound excess detection means is provided corresponding to each of the sound output means.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the occurrence of sound cracks in the sound output means.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main composition of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main composition of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing a configuration of a game board. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display device. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view showing composition of an outer frame. It is a cross-sectional view of the lower speaker unit and its periphery. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a main body frame. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for win/win lottery. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the fraud detection process performed in the main MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the electric wave detection processing performed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop determination process performed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special power control process performed by the main MPU. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the types of variable display modes, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an outline of each variable display mode. It is a flow chart which shows the confirmation processing for reservation notice. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing of a reservation command. It is a flow chart which shows payout state detection processing performed by payout control device 78. It is a flow chart which shows payout state receiving processing performed in a main MPU. It is the block diagram which shows the electric constitution which relates to the execution control of production. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the data structure of the direct ROM, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the data structure of the common ROM. FIG. 16 is a circuit diagram showing an electrical configuration of a sound breakage detection circuit 175. It is a figure for demonstrating the detection aspect of the sound breakage detection circuit 175. It is a flow chart which shows information and production control processing performed by a sub MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the corresponding process of the hold command performed by the sub MPU. 7 is a flowchart showing an operation of a sound data processing unit provided in the sound output LSI. It is a flowchart which shows the volume setting process performed by the sub MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the volume setting process of the guidance sound performed by the sub MPU. It is a flow chart which shows volume limit release processing performed by a sub MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the volume setting process of the effect sound performed by the sub MPU. It is a flow chart which shows volume harmony processing performed by a sub MPU. It is a time chart which illustrates the change aspect of the actual volume level of the sound signal input into each speaker. It is a flow chart which shows the volume limit release processing of the effect sound performed by the sub MPU. It is a time chart which illustrates the change aspect of the actual volume level about a speaker. It is a circuit diagram which shows the electric constitution of the sound crack detection circuit 175 in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the volume limit release process of the effect sound performed by the sub MPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the volume cancellation|release stage cancellation|release process performed by sub MPU. It is a flow chart which shows another volume setting processing performed by a sub MPU.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing a main configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in a developed manner. Note that, in FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

  The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plate members to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

  The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward when the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 can be turned forward in a front view with the left side being a rotation base end side and the right side being a rotation tip side. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 is turned rearward when viewed from the front with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation front end side. It is possible to move.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its pivoting front end, and the gaming machine main body 12 is locked to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. And has a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 such that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  Next, the configuration on the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 24.

  The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. A general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper working opening 33, a lower working opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a main display portion 43, and an accessory display portion 44 are provided in each opening. ing.

  When a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper working opening 33 and the lower working opening 34, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 24, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In this case, when a ball enters the upper working opening 33 and a ball enters the lower working opening 34, three prize balls are paid out, and the ball entering the general winning opening 31 is When it occurs, the payout of 10 prize balls is executed, and when the incident of the ball into the variable winning device 32 occurs, the payout of 15 prize balls is executed. However, the number of these award balls is arbitrary, for example, the number of award balls associated with the lower operating port 34 is larger than the number of award balls associated with the upper operating port 33. It may be different. In addition, the number of prize balls related to the variable winning device 32 is not limited to a configuration in which the number of prize balls is larger than the number of other prize balls. For example, the number may be smaller than the number of prize balls related to the general winning opening 31.

  In addition, an outlet 37 is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning openings are discharged from the game area through the outlet 37. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 38 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the aspect of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharging from the game area after passing through the opening. The mode which is not performed is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the outlet 37, the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper working opening 33, the lower working opening 34, or the through gate 35 Entering a game ball is also referred to as winning.

  The upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are unitized as a working port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are open upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 33 faces upward. The lower working port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  The electric accessory 34a is connected to an electric accessory driving unit 34b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the electric accessory driving unit 34b to be placed in either a closed state or an open state. .. In the closed state of the electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot enter the lower working port 34, and when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the winning of the lower working port 34 becomes possible.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and a state in which a game ball is easily won into the lower working opening 34 and a state in which a prize is less likely to occur than a state in which the prize is not impossible but the above winning is likely to occur are electrically driven. The accessory 34a may be switched. Alternatively, the electric accessory 34a may be omitted, and switching between a state in which a prize is more likely to occur and a state in which a prize is less likely to occur may be performed by the displacement of the lower working port 34 itself.

  The variable winning device 32 has a big winning opening (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32a that opens and closes the big winning opening. The open/close door 32a is connected to a variable winning drive unit 32b integrally provided as the variable winning device 32, and is driven by the variable winning drive unit 32b to be placed in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, normally, the game balls are in a closed state in which they cannot win, and when the internal lottery wins the transition to the open/close execution mode, the game balls can be switched to an open state in which they can win. By the way, the opening/closing execution mode is a mode to be switched to when a big hit or a special failure occurs. It should be noted that in the closed state, the winning is not impossible, but the winning state may be less likely to occur than in the open state.

  In the main display portion 43, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34 as a trigger, and as a result of the stop of the variable display, the winning of the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34 is achieved. The result of the internal lottery performed based on this is clearly displayed. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the winning of the upper working opening 33 and the winning of the lower working opening 34 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and the winning is performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34. The result of the extracted internal lottery is clearly shown on the main display section 43 which is a common display area. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operation opening 33 or the lower operation opening 34 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display portion 43. After it is displayed and the variable display is stopped, the mode is changed to the open/close execution mode.

  The main display section 43 is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by another type of display device such as a CRT or a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern variably displayed on the main display portion 43, a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality of A configuration in which the colors of the seeds are switched and displayed can be considered.

  In the accessory display unit 44, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 is displayed as the stop result of the variable display. Specified by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and the variable display is displayed. After the power supply is stopped, the state changes to the electric power release state. In the electric role open state, the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower operation port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 that variably displays a symbol, which is a type of symbol, and a center frame 42 is provided so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, and dot matrix display. It may be a container.

  In the symbol display device 41, variable display of symbols is started based on the winning of the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34. That is, when the variable display is performed on the main display section 43, the variable display is performed on the symbol display device 41 accordingly.

  The display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a display surface G of the symbol display device 41.

  Although illustration is omitted, the design, which is a kind of design, is composed of nine types of main designs to which the numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached and sub-designs composed of shell-shaped design designs. . More specifically, the numbers of "1" to "9" are respectively added to nine types of character designs such as octopus to constitute the main design.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display surface G of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of the upper stage, the middle stage and the lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending order of the numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol column Z2, nine kinds of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of the main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and configured by 20 symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, on the display surface G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3×3 are stopped and displayed. It is like this. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right downward line L4, and a right upward line L5 are set on the display surface G.

  When an effect for game play is performed on the display surface G based on the winning of the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The variable display starts at. Then, the variable display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbol is statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 for game play. Production is finished.

  In addition, when the production for game time ends, if it is a game time corresponding to the occurrence of a high-precision jackpot result described later, a combination of symbols with the same odd number is formed on one of the activated lines. If it is a game time corresponding to the occurrence of a low-probability jackpot result described later, a combination of symbols with the same even number attached to any of the activated lines is formed. The contents of each jackpot result will be described later.

  It should be noted that, based on the winning in one of the operation ports 33, 34, the variable display is started on the main display section 43 and the symbol display device 41, and a predetermined stop result is displayed until the variable display is stopped. It is equivalent to one game.

  Further, the manner of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, and the number of symbol columns, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the picture variably displayed on the picture display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned picture, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the picture.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a first holding light emitting portion (first holding lamp portion) 45 corresponding to the main display portion 43 and the symbol display device 41 is provided in the upper left portion on the front surface side of the center frame 42. The maximum number of game balls that enter the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34 is reserved up to four, and the reserved quantity is displayed by turning on the first pending light emitting section 45.

  A second holding light emitting portion (second holding lamp portion) 46 corresponding to the accessory display portion 44 is provided in the upper right portion of the center frame 42. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reservations is displayed by turning on the second holding light emitting unit 46. The functions of each of the hold light emitting units 45 and 46 may be performed by the display in a partial area of the symbol display device 41.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the game board 24 is provided with a magnet detection sensor 47a and a radio wave detection sensor 47b as abnormality detection means.

  The magnet detection sensor 47a is installed on the back side of the game board 24 around the upper working opening 33. As described above, the upper working opening 33 is a trigger for the internal lottery. Therefore, in the front of the window panel 57, a magnet is brought close to the upper working opening 33 to illegally guide the game ball to the upper working opening 33. is assumed. On the other hand, since the magnet detection sensor 47a is provided, it is possible to detect an unauthorized act using the magnet. The magnet detection sensor 47a is electrically connected to a main control device described later, and the detection result of the magnet detection sensor 47a is input to the main control device.

  The position of the magnet detection sensor 47a is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, in order to suppress a fraudulent attempt to illegally make a prize in the general winning opening 31 using the magnet, The magnet detection sensor 47a may be arranged around the general winning opening 31.

  The radio wave detection sensor 47b is installed on the back side of the game board 24 around the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34. More specifically about this position, the radio wave detection sensor 47b is disposed at a height position substantially the same as both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 in the height direction, and the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 in the lateral direction. It is arranged closer to the rotation base end side of the gaming machine body 12 than the lower operation port 34. Here, the payout device, which will be described later, that executes the payout of the game balls is arranged at a position closer to the rotation base end side of the gaming machine main body 12, so the radio wave detection sensor 47b laterally operates as an actuation opening device and a payout device. It can also be said that it is placed between.

  As described above, since the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are triggers for the internal lottery, the radio waves are illegally output toward the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 in front of the pachinko machine 10 and the It is conceivable that the detection sensor or the detection sensor of the lower actuation port 34 may erroneously detect the passage of the game ball. On the other hand, since the radio wave detection sensor 47b is provided, it is possible to detect when an illegal act using the radio wave is performed. The radio wave detection sensor 47b is electrically connected to a main control device described later, and the detection result of the radio wave detection sensor 47b is input to the main control device.

  The position of the radio wave detection sensor 47b is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be, for example, closer to the turning front end of the gaming machine body 12 than the actuation opening device, the actuation opening device and the variable winning device. You may arrange|position in the height position between 32. Further, the radio wave detection sensor 47b can detect radio waves of 50 MHz to 3 GHz as a predetermined frequency, but it should be possible to detect radio waves of a frequency that may cause the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 to be erroneously detected. For example, the range of the frequency is arbitrary, and the range of the frequency to be detected may be changed.

  An inner rail portion 48 and an outer rail portion 49 are attached to the game board 24, and the inner rail portion 48 and the outer rail portion 49 constitute a guide rail, and the game launched from the game ball launching mechanism 51. The ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 51 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21, and is stored in a launching rail 52 extending toward the guide rail and an upper plate 61a described later. It is provided with a ball feeding device 53 that supplies the game ball onto the launch rail 52, and a solenoid 54 that is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied onto the launch rail 52 toward the guide rail. By operating the firing handle 55 provided on the front door frame 14, the solenoid 54 is drive-controlled, and the game ball is fired.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is provided with a window portion 56 that allows almost the entire game area to be viewed from the front. The window portion 56 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 57 is fitted therein. The window panel 57 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be made of synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent. If possible, it may be formed to be colored and transparent.

  Around the window 56, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. A display lamp portion 58 is provided above the window portion 56 as a part of various lamp portions.

  Below the window portion 56 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 61 and a lower bulging portion 62 that bulge toward the front side are arranged in parallel vertically. An upper plate 61a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging part 61, and a lower plate 62a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging part 62. The upper plate 61a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 51 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 62a has a function of storing game balls that have become redundant in the upper plate 61a.

  The pachinko machine 10 has an upper speaker section 90 provided at the upper part of the pachinko machine 10 and a lower speaker section 100 provided at the lower part. The speaker units 90 and 100 can output sounds (audible sounds including voice messages) such as effect sounds and notification sounds. The effect sound is a sound capable of enhancing the effect effect during the game, and examples of the effect sound include a melody according to the effect and a sound effect according to the game state. Examples of the notification sound include a guide sound that informs the player of the state of the pachinko machine 10 and a fraudulent sound that informs the hall manager of fraud.

  A plurality of upper speaker parts 90 are provided on the upper part of the front door frame 14. Specifically, one upper speaker section 90 is provided in each upper corner portion of the front door frame 14 near each corner. Each upper speaker section 90 has an upper speaker 91 as a sound output unit that outputs a sound when a sound signal is input, and a speaker cover 92 that covers the upper speaker 91 from the front side of the pachinko machine. The speaker cover 92 forms a part of the front surface of the front door frame 14, and each upper speaker 91 is arranged on the back surface side of the speaker cover 92. In this case, the right upper speaker 91 and the left upper speaker 91 are paired.

  The speaker cover 92 is provided with a plurality of holes (not shown) penetrating in the thickness direction, and the sound output from the upper speaker 91 is transmitted to the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the holes of the speaker cover 92. .. Note that the speaker cover 92 does not have to have a hole for transmitting sound, as long as it has a structure capable of transmitting sound.

  The lower speaker unit 100 is attached to the lower portion of the outer frame 11. Here, the lower speaker unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 6 to 8. 6 is a perspective view of the outer frame 11, FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view of the periphery of the lower speaker unit 100.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the outer frame 11 is formed in a rectangular frame shape, and is configured by connecting long frame members arranged on four sides to each other. The outer frame 11 has, as frame materials, a lower frame portion 11a and an upper frame portion 11d arranged vertically, and frame portions 11b and 11c arranged left and right. The lower frame portion 11a has a larger plate width than the left and right frame portions 11b and 11c, and extends forward of the pachinko machine 10 beyond the left and right frame portions 11b and 11c. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. The outer frame 11 is made of wood, a synthetic resin material, a metal material, or the like.

  The lower speaker unit 100 includes a lower speaker 101 as a sound output unit that outputs a sound when a sound signal is input, a speaker housing 102 that supports the lower speaker 101, a lower speaker 101, and It has a curtain plate 103 that covers the speaker housing 102 from the front side of the pachinko machine, and is a speaker unit in which the lower speaker 101, the speaker housing 102, and the curtain plate 103 are integrated.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the lower end portion of the gaming machine main body 12 is spaced upward from the lower frame portion 11a of the outer frame 11, and the curtain plate 103 is provided in the spaced portion. The curtain plate 103 is formed in a thin plate shape with a colored opaque resin, and although not shown, the manufacturer name of the pachinko machine 10 is written on the front surface of the curtain plate 103. It should be noted that the model name of the pachinko machine 10 may be written on the front surface of the curtain plate 103, and these maker name and model name may not be written.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, a speaker housing 102 is provided behind the curtain plate 103. The speaker housing 102 is arranged between the gaming machine body 12 and the lower frame portion 11a, and extends in the width direction of the pachinko machine 10 along the lower frame portion 11a. The lower frame portion 11a is made of wood, and the speaker housing 102 is screwed to the lower frame portion 11a. The curtain plate 103 is screwed to the speaker housing 102.

  The speaker housing 102 is formed of a synthetic resin material or the like in a horizontally long box shape, and is placed on the lower frame portion 11a. The speaker housing 102 has a width dimension smaller than the distance between the left and right frame portions 11b and 11c, and is arranged between the frame portions 11b and 11c.

  One lower speaker 101 is provided for each of the left and right ends of the speaker housing 102. In this case, the lower speaker 101 is arranged on each of the left and right sides in the lower portion of the pachinko machine 10, and the right lower speaker 101 and the left lower speaker 101 are paired.

  Each lower speaker 101 is configured to output sound from the front side, and is housed inside the speaker housing 102 with the front side facing the front of the pachinko machine 10. On the front surface of the speaker housing 102, speaker openings 105 are formed so as to correspond to the mounting positions of the respective lower speakers 101, and the front surface of each lower speaker 101 is a speaker through the respective speaker openings 105. It is exposed on the front side of the housing 102.

  The lower speaker 101 has a flange portion 106 that extends outwardly around the front surface (sound output portion) thereof. The flange portion 106 is fixed to the front surface portion of the speaker housing 102 with screws or the like in a state of being overlapped with the outer surface of the front surface portion. In this case, the flange portion 106 is exposed on the front surface side of the speaker housing 102.

  The speaker housing 102 has a partition plate 107 that partitions the internal space into two parts, and the lower speaker 101 is inserted into each space partitioned by the partition plate 107. The speaker housing 102 is a hermetically sealed enclosure, and in the speaker housing 102, each space into which the lower speaker 101 is inserted is a sealed space.

  A plurality of speaker holes 103a are formed in the curtain plate 103 at positions facing the front surface of the lower speaker 101, and the sound output from the lower speaker 101 is transmitted to the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the speaker holes 103a. It has become. Therefore, even if the curtain plate 103 covers the lower speaker 101 from the front side of the pachinko machine, the sound output from the lower speaker 101 is blocked by the curtain plate 103 and becomes difficult to hear. Can be suppressed.

  Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), a main control device 71 which controls the main control of the game, and a voice and lamp display and a display control device (not shown) are controlled. And a sound/light control device 72 that controls the device.

  It should be noted that the substrate box 71a of the main control device 71 may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. Examples of the trace means include a configuration of a coupling portion (caulking portion) that requires a plurality of case bodies that form the substrate box 71a to be non-separably coupled and that requires a predetermined portion to be broken during the separation, and an adhesive layer to which the adhesive layer adheres when peeled. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace that it has been peeled off by being left behind is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. In addition, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies that form the substrate box 71a can be considered. In addition, you may provide such a trace structure in the board|substrate box of the payout control apparatus 78 mentioned later.

  The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 71 and the sound and light control device 72. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 73 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the payout mechanism unit 74 and the control device assembly unit 75 are attached to the back pack 73.

  The payout mechanism unit 74 includes a tank 76 to which game balls supplied from the island facility of the game arcade are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 77 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 76. The game ball paid out from the payout device 77 is discharged to the upper plate 61a or the lower plate 62a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 77. The payout mechanism 74 is supplied with a main power of, for example, 24 V AC, and is equipped with a back pack substrate having a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power.

  The control device gathering unit 75 is a payout control device 78 having a function of controlling the payout device 77, a predetermined electric power required by various control devices and the like is generated and output, and a game accompanying the operation of the firing handle 55 by the player. And a launch control device 79 for controlling the launch of the ball. The payout control device 78 and the power supply/launch control device 79 are arranged in front of and behind each other so that the payout control device 78 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The back pack 73 is provided with an external terminal board 81 in addition to the payout mechanism section 74 and the control device assembly unit 75. The external terminal board 81 is installed on the back corner of the back pack unit 15 on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 and in the upper corner portion. The external terminal board 81 is a board for outputting a predetermined signal so that the management computer in the game hall recognizes the state of the pachinko machine 10.

  A volume switch 111 for adjusting the volume (volume) of the sound output from the speakers 91 and 101 is provided on the back side of the gaming machine body 12. Here, the volume switch 111 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1, 9, and 10. 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the inner frame 13. Note that FIG. 9 is also a view of the back side of the inner frame 13 with the back pack unit 15 attached.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the volume switch 111 is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the sound/light control device 72, and serves as an operation unit that can be operated by a person from the back side of the gaming machine body 12. The volume switch 111 is a dial type switch (rotary switch), and can be switched to any of a plurality of states (positions) by being rotated by a person. On the surface of the sound/light control device 72, a plurality of scales indicating which of the plurality of positions the volume switch 111 is in is displayed.

  For example, the volume switch 111 can be switched to any of seven positions, for example, and seven scales (0 to 5, F) indicating each position are displayed. The volume switch 111 is provided with a mark indicating the position, and by adjusting the mark of the volume switch 111 to any one of a plurality of scales, the volume output from the speakers 91 and 101 can be adjusted to a size corresponding to the scale. Become.

  The volume switch 111 may be a slide type switch, a dip switch, or the like as long as it is a switch that can be switched to any of a plurality of positions. Further, the volume switch 111 may be a switch that does not have a plurality of positions and is capable of continuously changing its own state.

  On the outer peripheral surface of the sound/light control device 72, in addition to the volume switch 111, an operation knob 112 for variably setting a reference level of a sound breakage detection circuit 175 (see FIG. 24) described later is provided. The operation knob 112 is a dial type switch like the volume switch 111, and the reference level is changed by rotating the operation knob 112. In this case, the reference level is set according to the operating state of the operating knob 112. The operation knob 112 can set a reference level steplessly, and when it is turned clockwise or counterclockwise, the reference level is gradually increased, and when it is turned to the other, the reference level is set. Gradually reduce. The operation knob 112 may be a slide type switch, a DIP switch, or the like, like the volume switch 111.

  The operation knobs 112 are individually provided for the speakers 91 and 101, and a plurality (for example, four) are arranged side by side on the outer peripheral surface of the sound and light control device 72. The installation position of each operation knob 112 corresponds to the installation position of each speaker 91, 101. For example, when the inner frame 13 is viewed from the back side, the operation knob 112 arranged on the upper left of the four operation knobs 112 is the left side of the two upper speakers 91 (the right side when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front). ) Corresponding to the upper speaker 91, and the operation knob 112 arranged at the lower left is on the lower speaker 101 on the right side (the left side when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front) of the two lower speakers 101. It corresponds.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the sound/light control device 72 is covered with a back pack 73 from the back side of the pachinko machine, and the back pack 73 has a switch opening for exposing the volume switch 111 to the back side of the pachinko machine. 113 is formed. The switch opening 113 is arranged in a portion of the back pack 73 that covers the volume switch 111, and the switch opening 113 is provided with a switch lid 114 that can be opened and closed. The switch lid 114 is rotatably supported on the back pack 73, and the switch opening 113 is opened by rotating the switch lid 114 toward the back side of the pachinko machine. When the switch cover 114 is opened, the volume switch 111 can be operated while the back pack unit 15 is attached to the inner frame 13.

  The switch opening 113 does not open up to the portion of the back pack 73 that covers the operation knob 112. It should be noted that the operating knob 112 is less likely to be operated thereafter once the reference level is set, and is arranged at a position not overlapping the switch opening 113, so that the operating knob 112 is erroneously operated. Can be suppressed.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  The main control device 71 includes a main control board 121 that controls the main game, and a power failure monitor board (power interruption monitor board) 125 that monitors the power supply. A main MPU 122 is mounted on the main control board 121. The main MPU 122 has a built-in ROM 123 and RWM 124 in addition to a CPU, which is a central processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit.

  The ROM 123 is configured to use, as a read-only memory, a memory such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage and storage. The ROM 123 stores various control programs executed by the main MPU 122 and fixed value data.

  The RWM 124 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) such as an SRAM or a DRAM that needs to be supplied with electric power from the outside to retain the storage for both reading and writing, and allows random access and is the same. The time required for reading is shorter than that of the ROM 123 when compared by the data capacity of. The RWM 124 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 123.

  Further, the main MPU 122 or the main control board 121 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. It is not essential that the ROM 123 and the RWM 124 are integrated into one chip with respect to the main MPU 122, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

  The main MPU 122 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. To the input side of the main MPU 122, a power failure monitoring board 125, a payout control device 78, various winning detection sensors 126a to 126h, etc. are connected. A power supply and a firing control device 79 are connected to the power failure monitoring board 125, and power is supplied to the main MPU 122 via the power failure monitoring board 125.

  Further, the various winning detection sensors 126a to 126h are provided one-to-one with respect to the winning-corresponding ball portions such as the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper working opening 33, the lower working opening 34 and the through gate 35. Based on the detection results of the various winning detection sensors 126a to 126h, the main MPU 122 makes a winning determination (a winning determination) for each winning portion. In addition, the main MPU 122 executes the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34, and the support lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35.

  A magnet detection sensor 47a and a radio wave detection sensor 47b are electrically connected to the input side of the main MPU 122 via electrical wiring. The main MPU 122 receives signals from the magnet detection sensor 47a and the radio wave detection sensor 47b, and based on the reception results, it is determined whether or not any abnormality that is a detection target is generated.

  To the output side of the main MPU 122, the power failure monitoring board 125, the payout control device 78, and the sound/light control device 72 are connected. To the payout control device 78, for example, a prize ball command is output based on the result of the winning determination to the above-mentioned ball entering portion. Various commands such as a variation command, a classification command, a final stop command, an opening command and an ending command are output to the sound and light control device 72.

  In addition, on the output side of the main MPU 122, a variable winning a prize driving section 32b for opening and closing the opening/closing door 32a of the variable winning a prize device 32, an electric winning object driving section 34b for opening and closing the electric winning object 34a of the lower working opening 34, and a main display. The part 43 and the accessory display part 44 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 121, and the main MPU 122 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Although not described with reference to the drawings, the main MPU 122 also controls the light emission of the first holding light emitting unit 45 and the second holding light emitting unit 46.

  The power failure monitoring board 125 relays between the main control board 121 and the power supply/launch control device 79, and monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 79. The payout control device 78 controls the payout of prize balls or loan balls by the payout device 77 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 71.

  The power supply and launch control device 79 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the operating power necessary for each of the main control board 121 and the payout control device 78 is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do. Further, the power supply and the launch control device 79 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 51, and drives the game ball launch mechanism 51 based on the fact that a predetermined launch operation for the launch handle 55 is specified.

  The payout control device 78 is electrically connected to a full detection sensor 131 for detecting whether the lower plate 62a as a ball receiving plate is full of game balls, and the tank 76 is in a ball-free state. A ballless detection sensor 132 for detecting whether or not there is an electric connection. The full detection sensor 131 is provided in the passage for discharging the game ball to the lower plate 62a, and the tank no-ball detection sensor 132 is provided in the passage for supplying the game ball from the tank 76 to the payout device 77. ing. The fullness detection sensor 131 and the tank ball non-existence detection sensor 132 output a detection signal to the dispensing control device 78.

  A display lamp unit 58 and a display control device 128 are connected to the sound/light control device 72, and the sound/light control device 72 is provided in the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 71. The display control unit 128 is driven and the display lamp unit 58 is controlled. In the display control device 128, the display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed based on the command input from the sound and light control device 72.

  Further, the sound/light control device 72 is connected with a volume switch 111, an operation knob 112, an upper speaker 91, and a lower speaker 101. The volume switch 111 outputs a detection signal corresponding to its own position (the scale on which the mark of the volume switch 111 is aligned) to the sound and light control device 72, and the sound and light control device 72 is based on the detection signal. The position of the volume switch 111 is determined. Further, in the sound/light control device 72, the reference level of the sound breakage detection circuit 175 is set according to the operation state of the operation knob 112.

  The sound/light control device 72 outputs a sound signal according to the position of the volume switch 111 to the speakers 91, 101, and the sound signals from the sound/light control device 72 are input to the speakers 91, 101. As a result, a sound of a volume corresponding to the volume level of the sound signal is output. Each upper speaker 91 and each lower speaker 101 is individually connected to the sound/light control device 72 via a speaker path 135. The speaker path 135 is formed by electric wiring or the like.

<Electrical configuration for various lottery in main MPU 122>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various kinds of lottery in the main MPU 122 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main MPU 122 uses various counter information at the time of a game to perform a jackpot occurrence lottery, a display setting of the main display unit 43, a symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41, a display of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the jackpot random number counter C1 used in the lottery for jackpot occurrence, the jackpot type counter C2 used in determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are displaced. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery at the time, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of jackpot random number counter C1, and variation type for determining display continuation time in the main display unit 43 and the pattern display device 41. The counter CS is used. Further, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower operation port 34 is in the power release state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 137a of the RWM 124.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Each counter is updated at short time intervals. The information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the reserved storage area 137b as the acquired information storage unit when the winning of the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34 occurs. To be done.

  The hold storage area 137b includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and according to the winning history of the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34. Numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the winnings to the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34 occur successively a plurality of times, the first holding area RE1→the second holding area RE1. Numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2→third holding area RE3→fourth holding area RE4. Since the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 are provided in this manner, the winning history of the game balls to the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34 can be held and stored up to a maximum of four.

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, and may be another number such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when the variable display of the main display portion 43 is started, and when starting one game time, Based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, the judgment of win/fail is made.

  Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, it is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, reaches a maximum value, and then returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C1 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved storage area 137b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34.

  The value of the random number for the jackpot is stored as a win/loss table (win/win information group) in the win/win table storage area as the win/win information group storage means in the ROM 123. As the win/loss table, a win/loss table for low probability mode (low probability win/loss information group) and a win/loss table for high probability mode (high probability win/loss information group) are set. That is, the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low-probability mode (low-probability state) and the high-probability mode (high-probability state) as the lottery modes in the win/loss lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that is a big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the high probability mode win/loss table is referred to in the above-mentioned lottery, the number of random numbers to be a big win is 20. If the winning probability in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated and is stored in the holding storage area 137b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plural jackpot results are (1) a mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning/winning lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode, and (3) a bottom after the opening/closing execution mode. A plurality of jackpot results are set by differentiating the three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 34a of the operation port 34.

  As an aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, the high frequency is set so that the frequency of occurrence of winnings in the variable winning device 32 is relatively high from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in either the high frequency winning mode or the low frequency winning mode, the round game of a predetermined number of times is executed as an upper limit.

  Here, the round game means that a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, and that a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the special winning opening of the variable winning device 32. It is a game that continues until one of the conditions is met. Further, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the same as the fixed round number regardless of the type of jackpot result triggered by the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds (15R) regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of opening modes of the variable winning device 32 are set, with different opening durations (opening durations) from opening to closing of the special winning opening. ing. Specifically, a long time mode (long time mode) in which the opening duration is set to 29 seconds, which is a long time, and a short time in which the opening duration is set to 0.06 seconds, which is a short time shorter than the above long time. The mode (short-term mode) is set.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the firing handle 55 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 51 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area in 0.6 sec. .. Further, the upper limit number of end conditions for the round game is set to nine. Then, in the long time mode of the above-mentioned opening modes, the opening duration time is set to be longer than the product of the game cycle of the game ball and one round game. On the other hand, in the short time mode, the opening duration is set to be shorter than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and one round game, and more specifically, shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, when the variable winning device 32 is opened once for a long time, it is expected that the upper limit number of winnings in one round game will be generated for the big winning opening. When the variable winning a prize device 32 is opened once in the time mode, it is expected that no prize is won in the special winning opening, or that even if a prize is won, only one prize is won.

  In the high frequency winning mode, the large winning opening is opened once in each round game in a long time mode. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the big winning opening is opened once in a short time mode in each round game.

  In addition, the number of times of opening and closing of the special winning opening in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening and the upper limit number in one round game are higher in the high frequency winning mode. The value is not limited to the above value as long as the frequency of winning the variable winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher than that in the low frequency winning mode. is there.

  As a support mode of the lower working port 34 in the electric accessory 34a, when comparing in a situation where the game balls are continuously emitted in a similar manner to the game area, the electric working object 34a in the lower working port 34 is High frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) and low frequency support mode (low frequency support state or low frequency guide state) so that the frequency of open state per unit time becomes relatively high or low And are set.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the electric role open state wins in the electric role open lottery using the electric role open counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric-role open state is won is set to be larger than in the low-frequency support mode, and one more opening is performed. The time is set long. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, the electric power open state is won, and in the case where the electric accessory 34a is opened a plurality of times, it is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode is shorter than the low-frequency support mode in that the minimum secured time required for the next electric accessory release lottery after one electric accessory release lottery is performed is shorter. Is set to be selected.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the lower working opening 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the upper working opening 33 is higher than in the lower working opening 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the winning in the lower working opening 34 is higher than that in the upper working opening 33. The probability of winning a prize increases. Then, when a prize is given to the lower working opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls that he holds. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high frequency support mode being in the electric role open state per unit time is higher than that of the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-mentioned one. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of winning the electric role open state in is increased. In addition, a secured time that is secured when the next electric accessory release lottery is performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed (for example, on the accessory display unit 44 based on the winning of the through gate 35). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter securing time is easier to select or the average securing time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. It may have been done. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is increased, and the securing time that is secured when the next electric accessory release lottery is performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed (that is, , Shortening the one-time variable display time on the accessory display portion 44), shortening the average time of the securing time and increasing the winning probability, any one condition or a condition of any combination is applied. Therefore, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased.

  The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 123. Then, as such a distribution destination, a low-probability jackpot result (low-probability correspondence special game result), a low winning high-probability jackpot result (explicit high-probability correspondence game result or a result that suddenly changes into a probability state), and the most advantageous jackpot result ( High probability corresponding special game result) is set.

  The low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/winning lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

  The low winning high-accuracy jackpot result is a big hit result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/loss lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. is there. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the winning/winning lottery is a big hit state winning and the big hit state is brought about.

  The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/winning lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the winning/winning lottery is a big hit state winning and the big hit state is brought about.

  In addition, in relation to each of the above-mentioned gaming states, the normal gaming state is not the opening/closing execution mode (special gaming state), but the winning/winning lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. .. In addition, as a game result, a low winning high probability jackpot result may not be set.

  In the distribution table, "0-9" of the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0-29" correspond to the low-probability jackpot result, and "10-14" correspond to the low winning high-probability jackpot result. "15-29" corresponds to the most advantageous jackpot result.

  As a kind of high-precision jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/loss lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode is maintained to the previous mode. The implicit low winning award high probability jackpot result (the result of the implicit high probability corresponding game result or the latent probability changing state) that may be included may be included. In this case, the jackpot results can be further diversified.

  Furthermore, as a kind of the miss result in the win/win lottery, a special miss result which does not occur in the win/win lottery mode and the support mode after the transition to the opening/closing execution mode of the low frequency winning mode may be included. .. In a configuration in which both the above-mentioned implicit low winning award high certainty jackpot result and the special outlier result are set, the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the low frequency winning mode, and the support mode is While it is common to be maintained in the mode, while the transition mode of the win/loss lottery mode is different, for example, one of the implicit low winning high certainty jackpot result or the special outlier result in the normal gaming state When it occurs, it is possible for the player to predict which result it actually corresponds to.

  The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved storage area 137b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34.

  Here, the reach display is set in the pachinko machine 10 as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. Reach display is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (patterns), and variable display in game times in which the open/close execution mode of the variable winning device 32 is the high frequency winning mode. In the gaming machine in which the subsequent stop display result is the special display result, the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 41 is started, and then the stop display result is derived and displayed. It is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state in which a special display result is likely to occur.

  In the reach display, the symbols are stopped and displayed for a part of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, so that the combination of the jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high frequency winning mode can be achieved. It includes a display state in which reach symbol combinations that may be established are displayed, and variable display of symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol columns in that state. In addition, while displaying the combination of reach symbols as described above, while performing variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol columns, and displaying the predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image, the reach effect is performed. , Which includes reducing or displaying a combination of reach symbols and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen to perform a reach effect.

  The reach display is executed irrespective of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game time when the game is switched to the open/close execution mode which is the high frequency winning mode. Further, in the game time that does not shift to the open/close execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing refers to the reach display stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 123 in response to the occurrence of the reach display. Is executed if

  The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used for determining in the main MPU 122 the fluctuation display time (display continuation period) on the main display portion 43 and the fluctuation display time (display continuation period) of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated in each of the main processing and the timer interrupt processing described later, and the fluctuation type counter is used when the fluctuation pattern is determined at the start of fluctuation display on the main display portion 43 and at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. The value of CS is obtained. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table (variable display time information group) stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area (variable display time information storage means) of the ROM 123 is referred to.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured so that, for example, it is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and is stored in the electric reserve area 137c provided in the RWM 124 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed on whether or not the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

<Various processing executed by the main MPU 122>
Next, each process executed by the main MPU 122 to progress the game will be described. The processing of the main MPU 122 is roughly classified into a main processing activated when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing activated periodically.

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S101, a power-on wait process is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits for 1 sec after the main process is started without proceeding to the next process. In the subsequent step S102, the access of the RWM 124 is permitted, and in the step S103, the internal function register of the main MPU 122 is set.

  Then, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RWM erase switch provided in the power supply and firing control device 79 is manually operated, and in the following step S105, whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the RWM 124. To determine. In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed. In the following step S107, it is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored at the time of power-off, that is, the validity of the stored data. judge.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the RWM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RWM erase switch. Therefore, if the RWM delete switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Also, when the power-off occurrence information is not set, or when an abnormality in the stored and held data is confirmed by the checksum, the process similarly proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the RWM 124 is cleared as the initialization of the RWM 124. Then, it progresses to step S109.

  On the other hand, if the RWM erasing switch is not pressed, the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal, and the process of step S108 is executed without executing the process of step S109. Proceed to. In step S109, power-on setting processing is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RWM 124 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the sound and light control device 72 in order to recognize the current game state. To do. In addition, a payout initialization command indicating that the RWM of the payout control device 78 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout control device 78. Further, interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of timer interrupt processing.

  After that, the process proceeds to the residual process of steps S110 to S113. That is, the main MPU 122 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed using this irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual process of steps S110 to S113 is an irregular process that is irregularly executed.

  In the residual processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In a succeeding step S111, a random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and at the same time, a fluctuation counter updating process for updating the fluctuation type counter is executed in step S112. In these update processes, the current numerical value information is read from the corresponding counter of the RWM 124, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical value information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the counter of the reading source is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting for switching from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing the timer interrupt process in the main MPU 122 will be described. A clock circuit is provided on the main control board 121 as a pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and the frequency division is performed so that the clock circuit is present at an intermediate position of the signal path between the clock circuit and the main MPU 122. A circuit is provided.

  The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing unit that changes the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the activation timing of the timer interrupt process by the main MPU 122. That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the main MPU 122 at intervals of a specific cycle of 4 msec. The main MPU 122 executes a process for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as the rising or falling of the pulse signal, and activates the timer interrupt process on the condition that the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed. Run.

  In this case, if the occurrence of the above specific signal form is confirmed in the situation where the activation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is activated when the interrupt is changed from the disabled state to the enabled state. Interrupt processing is started. In other words, depending on the execution status of the process in the main MPU 122, the next timer interrupt process may be started 4.1 msec after the previous timer interrupt process was started, and when such an event occurs, the next timer interrupt process is started. The timer interrupt process of is started 3.9 msec after the immediately preceding timer interrupt process is started.

  However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed at a specific cycle such as 4 msec regardless of the progress of the processing in the main MPU 122, the timer interrupt processing is basically started at the specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 122 is such that even if the timer interrupt process at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific cycle has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt process was started, The timer interrupt processing at the timing absorbs the amount exceeding the specific period, and the timer interrupt processing at the next timing is set to be activated at the timing at which the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, the power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power cutoff is received from the power failure monitoring board 125, and when the occurrence of the power failure is specified, the power failure time processing is executed.

  In a succeeding step S202, lottery random number updating processing is executed. In the random number updating process for lottery, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after the current numerical value information is sequentially read from the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and the read numerical value information is incremented by 1, respectively. , The process of overwriting the counter of the reading source is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0".

  After that, in step S203, the random number initial value updating process is executed as in step S111, and at the same time, the fluctuation counter updating process is executed in step S204 as in step S112. In a succeeding step S205, a game stop determination process is executed. In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game should be stopped, and if the situation is such that the progress of the game should be stopped, the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped.

  Then, in step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped, and the processing of step S207 and the subsequent steps is executed on condition that the progress of the game is not stopped.

  In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting the various drive units 32b and 34b corresponding to the output information is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special winning opening of the variable winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 32b is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set. If so, the output of the drive signal is stopped. When the information for switching the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory driving unit 34b is started and the information for switching to the closed state is set. If so, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  In a succeeding step S208, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes.

  In a succeeding step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, the signals received from the respective winning detection sensors 126a to 126h are read, and the general winning opening 31, the large winning opening of the variable winning device 32, the upper working opening 33, the lower working opening 34, and the through gate 35 are read. The process of identifying whether or not there is a prize is executed.

  In a succeeding step S210, a timer updating process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RWM 124 is executed. In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are handled collectively, but both the subtraction-type timer counter update and the addition-type timer counter update are performed collectively. It may be configured.

  In a succeeding step S211, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraudulent monitoring target has occurred is executed. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the setting for game stop is made in step S205 in the next timer interrupt process. A positive determination is made in step S206.

  In a succeeding step S212, a firing control process for controlling the firing of the game ball is executed. In the situation where the firing operation is continued on the firing handle 55, as described above, one gaming ball is fired at a predetermined firing cycle of 0.6 sec.

  In a succeeding step S213, as input state monitoring processing, based on the information read in the reading processing in step S208, disconnection confirmation of each of the prize detection sensors 126a to 126h and opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed. To do.

  In a succeeding step S214, a special figure special power control process for performing game time execution control and opening/closing execution mode execution control is executed. In the special figure special electric power control process, when a prize is generated in the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34 in a situation where the number of pieces of holding information stored in the holding storage area 137b is less than the upper limit number, at that time point. A process of sequentially storing the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as holding information in the holding storage area 137b is executed. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, whether or not the hold information corresponds to the jackpot win determination, provided that the hold information is not stored during the game turn and the opening/closing execution mode and the hold information is stored. If it corresponds to the processing and the jackpot winning, the jackpot determination processing for determining which jackpot result the holding information corresponds to is executed. In addition, in the special figure special electric power control process, not only the win/loss determination process and the distribution determination process, but also when the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot win, whether the hold information corresponds to the reach occurrence or not. A reach determination process is performed, and a duration selection process is performed to select the duration of the game time by using the numerical value information of the variation type counter CS at that time. Then, the variation command including the information on the duration time corresponding to the result of each of the processes and the type command including the information on the game result are transmitted to the sound and light control device 72, and the variation of the pattern on the main display unit 43 is also transmitted. Start the display. As a result, one game time is started, and the effect for game time is started on the main display portion 43 and the symbol display device 41.

  Further, in the special figure special electric control process, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the game time during the execution of one game time, and if it is the end timing, the display corresponding to the game result is displayed. , Executes a process for ending the game time. In this case, the final stop command (or confirmation command) indicating that the game time should be ended is transmitted to the sound and light control device 72. In addition, in the special figure special electric power control process, when the result of the game time is a result corresponding to the shift to the open/close execution mode, a process for starting the open/close execution mode is executed. At the time of this start, an opening command indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound/light control device 72. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. In each of these processes, while transmitting a release command indicating that the round game is started (or the variable winning device 32 is in the open state) to the sound and light control device 72, the round game is ended (or variable). A closing command indicating that the winning device 32 is in the closed state) is transmitted to the sound/light control device 72. In addition, in the special figure special electric power control process, when ending the opening/closing execution mode, an ending command indicating that is transmitted to the sound/light control device 72, and the win/loss lottery mode and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode are set. Execute the process.

  After the special figure special electric power control processing of step S214 is executed in the timer interruption processing, the general figure normal electric power control processing is executed in step S215. In the general/universal/universal electric power control process, a process for obtaining the general/universal-university-side pending information is executed when a prize is paid to the through gate 35, and the general-universal/universal-side pending information is stored. Then, the release information is determined to be released, and the processing for performing the effect for the universal figure is executed when the release determination is triggered. In addition, based on the result of the open determination, a process of opening and closing the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is executed.

  In a succeeding step S216, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 and S215, the output information for reflecting the increased/decreased number of the hold information related to the main display section 43 on the first hold light emitting section 45 is set, and The output information for reflecting the increased/decreased number of the hold information related to the accessory display unit 44 on the second hold light emitting unit 46 is set. In step S216, the output information for updating the display content of the main display unit 43 is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 and S215, and the display content of the accessory display unit 44 is displayed. Set the output information for updating.

  In a succeeding step S217, a demo display process for making the display content of the symbol display device 41 for standby display in a situation where neither the game time nor the opening/closing execution mode is executed is executed, and in a step S218, The contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 78 are confirmed, and the payout state receiving process for performing the process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S219, payout output processing for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed.

  In the following step S220, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed. Further, in step S221, a process for editing the trial shooting test information is executed.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S206, or after the processing of steps S207 to S221 has been executed, the operation proceeds to step S222. In step S222, an interrupt end declaration is set. In the main MPU 122, when the timer interrupt process is activated once, it is defined that an interrupt end declaration is set as one of the conditions for activating the next timer interrupt process. Set the interrupt end declaration to enable execution of timer interrupt processing. In step S223, interrupt permission is set. In the main MPU 122, once the timer interrupt process is activated, it is set in the interrupt disabled state. Therefore, in step S223, the interrupt enable setting is made to enable execution of the next timer interrupt process. After that, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Fraud detection processing>
Next, the fraud detection process executed in step S211 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the fraud detection process, whether or not fraud of a plurality of predetermined detection targets has occurred is monitored, and when it is specified that fraud has occurred, a process for coping with it is executed. As such fraud of a plurality of types of detection targets, an act of illegally generating a prize for a game ball by using a magnet, an attempt to cause a special winning opening detection sensor of the variable winning device 32 to falsely detect a prize for a game ball. This includes actions and attempts to illegally generate a prize for a game ball using radio waves.

  Now, in the fraud detection process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 15, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the magnet detection sensor 47a is ON. Specifically, the magnet detection sensor 47a outputs a LOW level magnet detection signal corresponding to the non-detection when the generation of magnetism by the magnet is not detected, and also detects the generation of magnetism by the magnet. In this case, the HI level magnet detection signal is output during detection. The relationship between these LOW level and HI level may be reversed. The magnet detection signal is input to the input port of the main MPU 122 when the driver sets the signal as an input target of the main MPU 122. In step S301, by monitoring the input port, it is determined whether or not the magnet detection sensor 47a is detecting the occurrence of magnetism.

  When a negative determination is made in step S301, the magnet detection counter provided in the RWM 124 is cleared to "0" in step S302. The magnet detection counter is a counter for the main MPU 122 to specify the number of times that the magnet detection sensor 47a has confirmed that it is detecting the occurrence of magnetism.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S301, a process for adding 1 to the magnet detection counter is executed in step S303, and the numerical value information after the addition is "2" in step S304. Or not. That is, it is determined whether or not the main MPU 122 has confirmed that the magnet detection sensor 47a is detecting the occurrence of magnetism a plurality of times.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S304, the magnet detected flag is set in the RWM 124 to "1" to set the magnet detected state in step S305. In a succeeding step S306, the magnet detection command is set as an output target. The magnet detection command is a command for causing the sound/light control device 72, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that the main MPU 122 has specified the occurrence of an illegal act using a magnet. The command set as the output target in the main MPU 122 is transmitted to the control device of the output destination without executing special processing in the processing of the program of the main MPU 122.

  In step S307, an external output start process for abnormality is executed in order to make the management computer of the game hall recognize that the occurrence of the illegal act using the magnet has been identified. The output setting for the external terminal board 81 is executed by the external information setting process (step S220) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). This also applies to the following processing related to external output.

  If a negative determination is made in step S304 after the execution of step S302 or after the execution of step S307, the process proceeds to step S308. In step S308, it is determined whether or not a prize has been awarded to the variable winning device 32 by determining whether or not "1" is set in the big winning flag of the RWM 124. If a prize has been awarded to the variable winning device 32, it is determined in step S309 whether or not the special figure special power counter provided in the RWM 124 is "4". The contents of the special map special electric counter will be described in detail later, but the case where the counter is "4" means that the open/close door 32a of the variable winning device 32 is open.

  When the special map special electric counter is not "4", that is, when the opening/closing door 32a of the variable winning device 32 is closed, in the variable winning device 32, the grand prize is awarded despite the opening/closing door 32a being closed. It means that the game ball is detected by the mouth detection sensor. In this case, the process proceeds to step S310, and the fraudulent winning flag of the RWM 124 is set to "1" to set the fraudulent winning state. In a succeeding step S311, an unauthorized winning command is set as an output target. The fraudulent winning command is a command for causing the sound and light control device 72, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that a fraudulent act that causes the special winning opening detection sensor of the variable winning device 32 to erroneously detect a winning has occurred.

  In step S312, an abnormal external output start process is executed in order to make the management computer of the game hall recognize that the occurrence of the illegal act causing the illegal prize has been identified. In step S309, the time required for detecting the game ball elapses from the closing timing in consideration of the case where the game ball wins just before the opening/closing door 32a of the variable winning device 32 that is normally open is closed. The configuration may be such that negative determination is not performed until.

  When a negative determination is made in step S308, an affirmative determination is made in step S309, or after the execution of step S312, the radio wave detection processing is executed in step S313, and then the fraud detection processing is ended.

  Here, the radio wave detection processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the radio wave detection processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16, first in step S401, it is determined whether the radio wave detection sensor 47b is ON. Specifically, the radio wave detection sensor 47b outputs a LOW level radio wave detection signal corresponding to the non-detection when the radio wave is not detected, and the HI corresponding to the detection when the radio wave is detected. Outputs a level radio wave detection signal. The relationship between these LOW level and HI level may be reversed. The radio wave detection signal is input to the input port of the main MPU 122 when the signal is set as an input target of the main MPU 122 by the driver. In step S401, the input port is monitored to determine whether or not the radio wave detection sensor 47b is detecting a radio wave. If an affirmative decision is made in step S401, the operation proceeds to step S402.

  In step S402, it is determined whether the radio wave detection command has been set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the radio wave detection command set flag provided in the RWM 124. If a negative decision is made in step S402, the operation proceeds to step S403.

  In step S403, it is determined whether the radio wave has been detected. Specifically, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the radio wave detected flag provided in the RWM 124. When a negative determination is made in step S403, the process proceeds to step S404 and the radio wave detected counter provided in the RWM 124 is incremented by 1.

  In a succeeding step S405, it is determined whether or not the value of the radio wave detected counter is "2". If an affirmative decision is made in step S405, the operation proceeds to step S406 and the radio wave detected state is set. Specifically, "1" is set to the radio wave detected flag.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S403 or after the execution of step S406, it is determined in step S407 whether or not the capacity of the transmission data storage unit mounted on the main control board 121 is free. When an affirmative determination is made in step S407, the radio wave detection command is stored in the transmission data storage unit and set as the output target in subsequent step S408.

  The radio wave detection command is a command for causing the sound/light control device 72, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the main MPU 122 specifies that the radio wave is being detected. The sound/light control device 72 sets a voice emission pattern for radio wave detection when the radio wave detection command is received. Specifically, the radio wave detection command consists of 2-byte information. A radio wave detection command, upper information and lower information are provided, and each of these pieces of information is composed of 1 byte. Information that identifies a command for fraud detection is set in the upper information, and information that specifically identifies that a fraudulent activity using radio waves is detected is set in the lower information. The radio wave detection command is set as an output target by being stored in the transmission data storage unit.

  In a succeeding step S409, the radio wave detected flag is cleared. In the following step S410, the value of the radio wave detection completed counter is cleared, and in the following step S411, the radio wave detection command is set. Specifically, "1" is set to the flag for setting the radio wave detection command.

  In a succeeding step S412, an abnormal external output starting process is executed in order to make the management computer of the game hall recognize that the occurrence of the illegal act using the radio wave is specified. The output setting for the external terminal board 81 is executed by the external information setting process of step S220 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  When a negative determination is made in step S407 or after the execution of step S412, the fraud detection process is ended.

  If a negative determination is made in step S401, the radio wave detection command set flag is cleared in step S413. When an affirmative determination is made in step S402, a negative determination is made in step S405, or after the execution of step S413, the fraud detection process ends.

<Game stop determination processing>
Next, the game stop determination process executed in step S205 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the game stop determination process, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the magnet has been detected, whether or not it is in the illegal winning state in step S502, and whether or not it is in the radio wave detection state in step S503. Determine whether or not. Then, when a negative determination is made in all of steps S501 to S503, the present game stop determination processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S501 to S503, the process proceeds to step S504. In step S504, a process of setting all output states at the output ports of the main MPU 122 to "0" is executed. As a result, even if the opening/closing door 32a of the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the opening/closing door 32a of the variable winning device 32 is closed by stopping the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 32b. It is switched to the state. Even when the electric accessory 34a of the lower operation port 34 is in the open state, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory driving unit 34b is stopped to switch the electric accessory 34a to the closed state. .. Further, even in the situation where the main MPU 122 outputs the HI level emission permission signal toward the power supply and the emission control device 79, it is switched to the LOW level emission permission signal and the emission of the game ball is prohibited. It

  In a succeeding step S505, the game stop state is set by setting "1" to the game stop flag provided in the RWM 124. In subsequent step S506, other cancellation processing is executed. For example, a game stop command is output to the payout control device 78, thereby stopping the payout of game balls by the payout device 77. In addition, a game stop command is output to the sound and light control device 72, thereby stopping the variable display of the patterns on the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44. Then, this game stop determination processing is ended.

  By setting the game stop state in the game stop determination process as described above, an affirmative determination is made in step S206 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). Then, when an affirmative determination is made in step S206, the processes of steps S207 to S221 are skipped. The processing of these steps S207 to S221 is processing for substantially advancing the game, and by skipping such processing, the advancing of the game can be stopped.

  However, even in the game stopped state, the power failure information storage process of step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is not skipped. As a result, even if a power failure occurs during the game stopped state, it is possible to normally execute the power failure process. Assuming that the power outage process is not normally executed during the game stop state, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off when the game stop state is set, the power failure flag is set and the checksum is calculated normally. If not executed, the RWM 124 is initialized when the main process is started. Then, the game stopped state can be released through a simple power-off of the pachinko machine 10. In such a case, for example, if the act of turning off the power of the pachinko machine 10 is performed after the game balls have been illegally paid out due to the fraudulent act, it becomes difficult to detect the misbehavior, and then the pachinko machine 10 becomes normal. It becomes possible to repeat such fraudulent acts due to the fact that the above acts. On the other hand, since the process at the time of power failure is normally executed even during the game stopped state, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off after performing the above-mentioned cheating, the game will be stopped after the power is restored. As a result, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be prevented.

  As described above, the game stopped state is not released even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, but by manually operating the RWM erasing switch provided in the power supply and the firing control device 79 and cutting off the power, the main processing ( Through the processing of step S108 in FIG. 13), the game stop flag is cleared and cleared to "0". Further, at this time, the state of performing external output regarding the detection of fraud is also canceled. In this case, since the power supply and firing control device 79 is provided on the rearmost surface of the pachinko machine 10, it is difficult for a fraudulent person to manually operate the RWM erasing switch. Incidentally, in order to make such operability more difficult, the RWM erasing switch may be provided at a position covered from the back side by the back pack 73 and other members.

  By the way, even in the game stopped state, the process of updating the various lottery counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is continued without being skipped. As a result, it is possible to continue updating the various lottery counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS even during the game stopped state. In this configuration, even if the RWM erase switch is operated and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the initialization of the various lottery counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is not executed, and the game stopped state is released. At this time, it is more effective to apply it to a configuration that does not require the initialization of the RWM 124.

  As described above, in the configuration in which a plurality of types of fraudulent acts targeted for game stop are set, in the process of identifying the occurrence of each fraudulent activity in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the presence or absence of such fraudulent activity is identified. In particular, the specific process for stopping the game is executed at the timing before the process for substantially advancing the game is executed in the timer interrupt process. As a result, as compared with the case of immediately executing the process for stopping the game when the occurrence of each misconduct is specified, the process for stopping the game can be integrated into one process, and the process can be simplified. Planned.

  Further, even if the processing for stopping the game is not executed immediately when the occurrence of the fraudulent activity is specified, when the occurrence of the fraudulent activity is specified, the notification is immediately executed. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can detect fraud early. Further, since the external output for abnormal use is also immediately performed when the occurrence of the fraudulent activity is identified, for example, if the time when the external output is performed is stored as management data in the management computer of the game hall, It is possible for the manager of the game hall to grasp the time at the moment when the occurrence of the fraudulent activity is specified.

<Special map special electric control processing>
Next, the special figure special power control processing executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the special figure special electric control process, the process for acquiring the hold information is performed when a winning is generated in the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34, and the holding information is held when the holding information is stored. Whether or not the information is true or false is determined, and the processing for performing the effect for game reuse is executed when the right or false determination is made. In addition, based on the result of the hit/miss determination, a process of shifting to the open/close execution mode after the game use effect is executed, and a process during the open/close execution mode and at the end of the open/close execution mode is executed.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, first, in step S601, a process of acquiring hold information is executed. In the process of acquiring the hold information, it is determined whether or not a prize has been paid to the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34, and if a winning has occurred, the number of holdings in the holding storage area 137b is the upper limit value ( In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is less than “4”). When the number of reservations is less than the upper limit, the number of reservations is incremented by 1, and the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S202 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). Each of the numerical information is stored in the first holding area among the empty holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE.

  In addition, when the winnings to the upper working opening 33 and the lower working opening 34 occur at the same time, the processing for acquiring the holding information is performed a plurality of times within the range in which the processing for acquiring the holding information is executed once. Run.

  After executing the acquisition processing of the hold information in step S601, the process proceeds to steps S602 and S603. In step S602 and step S603, the confirmation processing and the reservation for the reservation notice are processing for making the sound and light control device 72 and the display control device 128 recognize that the winning in the upper operation opening 33 or the lower operation opening 34 has occurred. Execute the command setting process.

  The hold command set in the hold command setting process in step S603 is transmitted to the sound and light control device 72. A detailed description of each process of steps S602 and S603 will be given later.

  In a succeeding step S604, a process of reading the information of the special figure special power counter provided in the RWM 124 is executed, and a process of reading the special figure special power address table from the ROM 123 is executed in step S605. Then, in step S606, a process of acquiring a start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric counter from the special figure special electric address table is executed.

  Here, the processing contents of steps S604 to S606 will be described.

  As described above, the special figure special electric power control process includes a process related to the game turning effect and a process related to the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, as the process related to the game use effect, there are a special figure variation start process (step S608) for starting the game use effect and a process for advancing the game use effect. A certain special figure changing process (step S609) and a special figure fixing process (step S610), which is a process for ending the effect for game play, are set.

  Further, as a process related to the opening/closing execution mode, a special electric power starting process (step S611) that is a process for controlling the opening of the opening/closing execution mode, and a state for opening the special winning opening of the variable winning a prize device 32 are controlled. At the time of ending the open/close execution mode and at the end of the open/close execution mode, the special electric open during processing (step S612) which is the processing, the special electric close during processing (step S613) which is processing for controlling the closed state of the special winning opening The special electric power ending process (step S614), which is a process for controlling the transition of the gaming state, is set.

  In such a processing configuration, the special figure special telephone counter is a counter for the main MPU 122 to know which of the above-mentioned plural types of processing should be executed. The start address of the program for executing the above-described plural kinds of processing is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the figure special electric counter.

  In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation start process (step S608), and the start address SA1 is the program address for executing the special figure variation process (step S609). The start address SA2 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure finalization process (step S610), and the start address SA3 is the program for executing the special electric power start process (step S611). The start address SA4 is a start address of a program for executing the special electric power releasing process (step S612), and the start address SA5 is a program for executing the special electric power closing process (step S613). The start address SA6 is a start address of a program for executing the special electric power termination processing (step S614).

  The special map special electric counter controls the special figure special electric control at the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information when the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is completed is satisfied. One addition, one subtraction or "0" is cleared (initialized) corresponding to the processing executed in the processing. Therefore, in the special figure special power control processing at each processing time, it is only necessary to execute the processing according to the numerical information set in the special figure special power counter.

  After executing the process of step S606, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S606 is executed in step S607. Specifically, when the acquired start address is SA0, the process jumps to the special figure variation start process of step S608.

  In the special figure variation start process, on the condition that the pending information is stored in a reserved state, the pending information is shifted to the execution area AE of the pending storage area 137b, and the data in each of the pending areas RE1 to RE4 is stored. The process of shifting to the upper side (that is, the first holding area RE1 side) is executed. After that, with respect to the pending information shifted to the execution area AE, a win/loss determination process for determining whether or not the jackpot winning is supported, and when the jackpot winning is supported, the pending information corresponds to any jackpot result. The distribution determination process for determining whether or not the process is being performed is executed. At the time of the winning/judging determination process, it is determined whether or not the numerical information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1 in the hold information is the numerical information corresponding to the jackpot winning. Further, in the distribution determination process, it is determined whether the numerical information obtained from the jackpot type counter C2 in the hold information corresponds to which jackpot result category.

  In addition to the win/loss judgment process and the distribution judgment process, when the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot win, the reach judgment process for determining whether or not the hold information corresponds to the occurrence of the reach is executed. , The selection processing of the duration time for selecting the duration time of the game time is executed by using the numerical value information of the variation type counter CS at that time. In the reach determination process, it is determined whether or not the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information corresponds to the numerical information indicating that the reach has occurred.

  When the duration information is selected, the variation command including the duration information and the type command including the game result information are transmitted to the sound/light control device 72, and the variation of the pattern on the main display unit 43 is also transmitted. Start the display. As a result, one game time is started, and the effect for game time is started on the main display portion 43 and the symbol display device 41.

  By the way, when the production for game play is started in this way, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special map special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter is changed from that corresponding to the special figure variation start process to the special figure. Update to the one corresponding to the changing process.

  When the acquired start address is SA1, the process jumps to the special figure changing process in step S609. In the special figure changing process, a process of determining whether or not it is the timing before the fixed display during the duration of the game time, and if it is before the fixed display, the display mode of the pattern on the main display portion 43 The process for changing the is regularly executed.

  By the way, instead of waiting in the special figure changing process until it becomes the fixed display timing, if it is not the fixed display timing, after performing the process for regularly changing the above The process ends. Therefore, after the effect for game use is started, the special figure changing process is started each time the special figure special power control process is started until the fixed display timing comes. Further, when it comes to the time of finalizing display, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special map special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special figure changing process from the special figure changing process. Update to what you did.

  If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the special figure fixing process in step S610. In the special figure finalization process, in order to display the final stop display of the stop result of the current game on the symbol display device 41, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound and light control device 72, and the main display portion 43 displays the pattern. The mode is a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game. Further, in the special figure finalizing process, it is determined whether or not the period during the finalized display has passed, and if the period has passed, it is determined whether or not the transition to the open/close execution mode occurs. When the transition to the open/close execution mode occurs, the process for the mode transition is executed.

  By the way, instead of waiting in the special figure finalizing process until the fixed display period elapses, if the special period finalizing process has not elapsed, this special figure finalizing process ends. Therefore, after the fixed display is started, the special figure fixing process is started every time the special drawing special power control process is started until the period of the fixed display is elapsed. In addition, when the period during the fixed display has elapsed, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is initialized (that is, "0" is cleared) in the situation where the transition to the open/close execution mode does not occur, and the transition to the open/close execution mode is performed. In such a situation that the value of the special figure special electric power counter is incremented by 1, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special figure fixing process to the value corresponding to the special electric power start processing.

  If the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the special power start process in step S611. In the special power start process, an opening command indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound/light control device 72. Further, in the special electric power starting process, it is determined whether or not the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode has elapsed. When the opening period has not elapsed, the special electric power start processing is ended instead of waiting in the special electric power start processing. Therefore, after the opening effect in the opening/closing execution mode is started, the special power start processing is started each time the special map special power control processing is started until the opening period elapses. Further, when the opening period has elapsed, the numerical information of the special map special electric power counter is incremented by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special electric power start process to the value corresponding to the special electric power open process. ..

  When the acquired start address is SA4, the process jumps to the special electric power releasing processing of step S612. In the special electric open processing, the round game of 1 is started and it is determined whether or not the ending condition of the round game is satisfied. When the ending condition is not satisfied, the special electric power releasing process is not waited, but the special electric power releasing process is ended after executing the process for monitoring the end condition being satisfied. When the above termination condition is satisfied, the numerical information of the special map special electric power counter is incremented by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special electric power open during processing to the special electric power close during processing. Update.

  If the acquired start address is SA5, the process jumps to the special electric power closing process in step S613. In the special electric closed process, a process for ending one round game is executed. Also, in the interval period between round games, it is determined whether or not the interval period has elapsed. When the interval period has not elapsed, the special electric power closing process is terminated instead of waiting in the special electric power closing process. Therefore, when the interval period is started, the special electric power closing control process is activated each time the special figure special electric power control process is activated until the period elapses. Further, when the interval period has elapsed, the numerical information of the special map special electric power counter is decremented by 1, and the numerical information of the counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special electric power closing processing to the special electric power opening processing. To do.

  On the other hand, in the special electric closing process for the last round game, after executing the process of ending the round game of 1, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1, and the numerical information of the counter is changed to the special electric closing process. Update from the corresponding one to the one corresponding to the special telephone end process.

  If the acquired start address is SA6, the process jumps to the special electric power termination process in step S614. In the special power end processing, an ending command indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is ended is transmitted to the sound/light control device 72. Further, in the special electric power termination processing, it is determined whether or not the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode has elapsed. If the ending period has not elapsed, the special electric power ending processing is ended instead of waiting in the special electric power ending processing. Therefore, after the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode is started, the special electric power ending process is activated each time the special figure special electric power control process is activated until the ending period elapses. In addition, when the ending period has elapsed, after executing the process for setting the game state (open/close lottery mode and support mode) after the opening/closing execution mode, the numerical information of the special map special electricity counter can be initialized. , The numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electricity ending process to the one corresponding to the special figure variation starting process.

  Next, a variation display mode of the symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41 (display surface G) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19A is a schematic diagram showing types of variable display modes, and FIG. 19B is a schematic diagram showing an outline of each variable display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 19(a), regarding the variable display mode of the symbols executed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 41, complete deviation, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, super reach are obtained. It is roughly divided into 5 categories. For each of these variable display modes, the variable display time is set to be different, and the outline of the variable display mode for each game is grasped based on the information relating to the variable display time given to the command from the main controller 71. It is possible.

  Specifically, "3 sec to 8 sec" (variation is set according to the number of holdings) for the variable display time of complete deviation, "10 sec" for the variable display time of normal reach A, and the variable display time of normal reach B. Is longer than the fluctuation display time of the normal reach A, “15 sec”, the fluctuation display time of the super reach A is “16 sec” longer than the fluctuation display time of the normal reach A and B, and the super reach is the fluctuation display time of the super reach B. The variable display time of A is longer than 17 sec, and the variable display time of super reach C is 18 sec, which is longer than the variable display time of other super reach A and B. It is set to increase the expectation of winning the jackpot. For example, when the information regarding the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 71 is “15 sec”, the display control device 128 recognizes that the normal reach B should be executed.

  Here, the variable display mode of the normal reach A and B will be described with reference to FIG. When the normal reach A or B is selected, first, the variable display (scroll display) of all the symbol columns that are stopped and displayed is started, and then the variable display of the symbols is ended in the upper symbol column Z1 (stop). Then, the variable display of the symbols is terminated (stopped) in the lower symbol row Z3. In this way, in the state where the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped and displayed, the reach line is reached by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 5). Is formed. Then, under the condition that the reach line is formed, the reach display is performed by performing the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2. After the reach display, the variable display ends by stopping and displaying the middle symbol row Z2. Then, the fact that the same symbols as those constituting the reach display are stopped on the reach line is notified that the jackpot is won, and the other symbols are stopped on the reach line to win the jackpot. The fact that they have not done so will be notified. In this way, the combination of symbols finally displayed as stopped is maintained as it is for a predetermined period. That is, the current game time continues until the stop display period elapses, and when the stop display period elapses, the transition to the next game time is permitted.

  In the present embodiment, the difference in the variable display time between the normal reach A and the normal reach B is secured by setting the difference in the variable display time of the middle symbol row Z2 after the reach line is formed. The method of setting the difference of is arbitrary. For example, it is possible to secure the above-mentioned difference in the variable display time by setting a difference in the time from the start of the variable display to the formation of the reach line.

  Next, the variable display mode of the super reach A, B, C will be described based on the variable display mode of the normal reach A, B described above. As shown in FIGS. 19(b2) to (b4), for the super reach A, B, C, the reach line described above is formed through the same process as the normal reach A, B. Then, after the reach line is formed, the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character as a moving image together with the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, in Super Reach A, after a reach line is formed, a character imitating a fairy is displayed in the center of the variable display area (center of the variable display area ME) of the middle symbol row Z2, and in Super Reach B. After the reach line is formed, a character imitating a boy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (center of the variable display area ME), and after the reach line is formed in super reach C, A character simulating a girl will be displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME).

<Confirmation process for holding notice>
Next, the confirmation process for holding advance notice executed in step S602 of the special electric special diagram control process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the confirmation process for the reservation notice, first, in step S701, the reservation information newly acquired in the reservation information acquisition process in step S601 immediately before in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 18) is stored in the main MPU 122. Store in register. After that, in steps S702 to S7036, it is confirmed whether or not the pending information acquired by the present winning includes the jackpot winning information.

  Specifically, first, in step S702, the jackpot determination information, that is, the already-obtained jackpot random number counter C1 among the newly acquired hold information, based on the current winning of the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34. Figure out the value of.

  In a succeeding step S703, it is determined whether or not the low probability mode is set. Specifically, by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RWM 124, it is determined whether or not the current winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode. In the case of the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S704, and the jackpot determination information (the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S702 with reference to the win/loss table for the low probability mode corresponds to the jackpot winning. Determine if it is included in the group. If it is in the high-probability mode, the process proceeds to step S705, and it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is included in the information set as the jackpot win by referring to the above-described win/loss table for the high-probability mode. To do.

  After step S704 or step S705, the process proceeds to step S706, and it is determined whether the information for jackpot determination (the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S702 corresponds to jackpot winning. If the jackpot is won, the jackpot information is stored in the register of the main MPU 122 in step S707, and the confirmation process for the preliminary notice of holding is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if a negative decision is made in step S706, the operation proceeds to step S708. In step S708, based on the current winning of the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34, the information for the out-reach determination of the newly acquired hold information, that is, the value of the reach random number counter C3 that has been acquired is grasped.

  In the following step S709, the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) of the ROM 123 is referred to, and the reach determined in step S708 is referred to. Whether or not the information for determination (the value of the reach random number counter C3) is included in the information set as the reach winning is specified.

  After executing the process of step S709, the process proceeds to step S710, and it is determined whether the reach determination information (the value of the reach random number counter C3) grasped in step S708 corresponds to the reach occurrence. When the reach occurrence is supported, the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the main MPU 122 in step S711, and then this confirmation processing is ended. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach, the present confirmation processing is ended as it is.

<Hold command setting process>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 21, the setting process of the hold command will be described.

  In the setting process of the hold command, first, in step S801, by determining whether or not the jackpot information is stored in the register of the main MPU 122, the last hold notice in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 18) is determined. In the confirmation process (FIG. 20) of (1), it is determined whether or not the information for jackpot determination is specified as corresponding to jackpot winning. If the big hit information is stored, the process proceeds to step S802, and a big hit holding command is set. The above-mentioned command settings and various command settings described later are performed by storing command information in a command setting area provided in the RWM 124.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, when the jackpot information is not stored in the register of the main MPU 122, the process proceeds to step S803, and the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the main MPU 122. By determining whether or not the reach determination information has been identified as corresponding to the occurrence of the reach in the confirmation process (FIG. 20) for the previous notice of holding in the special map special electric control process (FIG. 18). To determine. If the reach occurrence information is stored, the detachment-retaining hold command is set in step S804, and if the reach occurrence information is not stored, the complete detachment-holding command is set in step S805.

  When setting the hold command in steps S802, S804, and S805, the variable display time is determined by referring to the stored value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the variation type counter CS, and the like, and the variable display is performed. Store time-consuming information in the pending command. The variable display time table is referred to when determining the variable display time. The hold command set in this way is transmitted to the display control device 128, and the display control device 128 can grasp the variable display mode of the symbols based on the hold command.

  After executing the command setting process in any of step S802, step S804, and step S805, in step S806, a process of setting information on the number of holdings for the holding command is executed. As such processing, specifically, the information of the set hold command described above is configured as a plurality of bytes of information, and for some of the bits, information indicating that the command is a hold command and the hold command. The information of the type is included, and the information of the held number can be set. In this case, in step S806, first, the information on the number of holdings stored in the register of the main MPU 122 in step S701 in the confirmation processing for holding reservation notice immediately before (FIG. 20) is read out, and then the holding has already been set. The read information about the number of reserved pieces is stored in the command bit for the information about the number of reserved pieces in the command by a logical sum operation. As a result, with respect to the hold command set in any one of the processing of step S802, step S804, and step S805, information for specifying the number of hold information corresponding to the hold command. Will be included. After executing the processing in step S806 described in detail above, this hold command setting processing is ended.

  In addition, the hold command including the information of the hold number in step S806 is transmitted to the sound and light control device 72. The sound and light control device 72 identifies that the hold information has increased by receiving the hold command. Further, the sound and light control device 72 transmits the hold command to the display control device 128 while maintaining its form. The display control device 128 executes processing for image data preparation based on the received hold command. The preparation process will be described later in detail.

  In addition, how to set the hold command, depending on the hold command in the display control device 128, whether there is a jackpot win, in the case of jackpot win, the jackpot type at that time, if there is no jackpot win It is optional as long as the variable display mode of the symbol can be specified. For example, a combination of a jackpot-supported hold command, an out-reach-supported hold command, and a complete disconnection-supported hold command is individually set in correspondence with each of the number of holds, and in the hold command setting process, a confirmation process for a hold notice ( It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one hold command is selected according to the confirmation result in FIG. 20).

<Payout status reception process>
Next, the payout state receiving process executed in step S218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  Here, the payout control device 78 periodically executes a payout state detection process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22 (for example, a 2 msec cycle), and executes a process corresponding to reception of various commands in the process. To do. Here, first, the payout state detection process by the payout control device 78 will be described, and then the payout state reception process by the main control device 71 will be described.

  In the payout state detection process, it is first determined in step S901 whether or not the prize ball completion state is detected. Specifically, it is confirmed that the game balls corresponding to the number of prize balls of the prize ball command received from the main control device 71 are paid out from the payout device 77 (payout is completed). In addition, the payout device 77 is provided with a payout detection sensor that individually detects the game balls sent to the downstream side, and confirms that the payout is completed based on the output result of the payout detection sensor. ..

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S901, the payout motor abnormality command is stored in the transmission data storage unit and set as the output target in step S902. When a negative determination is made in step S901 or after the execution of step S902, it is determined in step S903 whether or not the tank ball non-state is detected. Specifically, the ball-free state of the tank 76 is detected by checking the output result of the ball-free detection sensor 132. The ball-free detection sensor 132 outputs a LOW level detection signal corresponding to the non-detection state when the number of game balls stored in the tank 76 is a predetermined number or more. If the number is smaller than the predetermined number, a HI level detection signal corresponding to the detected state is output. When the detection signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and thereafter the HI level detection signal is detected over a plurality of processing times, it is determined that there is no tank ball.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S903, a tank ball non-command is stored in the transmission data storage unit in step S904 and is set as an output target. When a negative determination is made in step S903 or after the execution of step S904, it is determined in step S905 whether or not the lower plate full state is detected. Specifically, the full state of the lower plate 62a is detected by checking the output result of the full detection sensor 131. When the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 62a is less than a predetermined number, the full detection sensor 131 outputs a LOW level winning detection signal corresponding to the non-detection time, and when the number is equal to or more than the predetermined number. Outputs a winning detection signal of HI level corresponding to that during detection. When the detection signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and thereafter the HI level detection signal is detected over a plurality of processing times, it is determined that the lower plate is full.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S905, the lower plate full command is stored in the transmission data storage unit and set as the output target in step S906. When a negative determination is made in step S905 or after the execution of step S906, it is determined in step S907 whether or not an abnormal end state is detected. Specifically, from the state in which any one of the dispensing motor abnormal state, the tank ball non-state, and the lower tray full state described above is detected, the state is not detected, and the above-mentioned each over a plurality of processing times. If the state is not detected, it is determined that the state is an abnormal end state.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S907, the abnormal termination command is stored in the transmission data storage unit in step S908 and is set as the output target. When the negative determination is made in step S907 or after the execution of step S908, the present payout state detection process is ended.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the power from the power supply and the firing control device 79 is supplied to the RWM 124 of the main control device 71, but not to the RWM of the payout control device 78. With this configuration, the capacity of the power supply and firing control device 79 can be reduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced accordingly.

  However, in the configuration, when the power supply from the external power source to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, all the information stored in the RWM of the payout control device 78 is erased (destroyed). In this case, if all the information on the number of unpaid prize balls is stored in the RWM of the payout control device 78 as in the conventional pachinko machine, the number of unpaid prize balls is transferred to the pachinko machine 10. When the power supply is stopped, all the unpaid prize balls are erased without being paid out. Then, it causes a great disadvantage to the player.

  On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the unpaid prize ball information is basically stored in the RWM 124, and when the main MPU 122 receives the HI level payout permission signal from the payout control device 78, the payout control is performed. A prize ball command is transmitted to the device 78. Then, in the payout control device 78, the information of the number of prize balls stored in the RWM of the payout control device 78 is, at the maximum, the maximum number of prize balls (15 prize balls) for one winning, and the permission criterion described later. The timing for switching the payout permission signal between the HI level and the LOW level is set so as to be the sum of the numbers. It should be noted that the number of permission standards is the minimum number of prize balls per winning or less. As a result, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped in the situation where a large number of unpaid prize balls remain, the number of prize balls erased at that time can be minimized. That is, the payout permission signal is information output from the payout control device 78 to the main MPU 122 in order to specify the output timing of the prize ball command in the main MPU 122.

  In the payout state reception process, it is determined whether or not the prize ball command can be output to the payout control device 78 based on the information received from the payout control device 78 including the payout permission signal. Set.

  Now, in the payout state receiving process executed by the main control device 71, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 23, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not a tank-no-ball command is received from the payout control device 78. .. As described above, the tank no ball command is transmitted from the payout control device 78 when the no ball detection sensor 132 detects the no ball state of the tank 76, and corresponds to the abnormal payout command.

  If the no-ball-ball command is received, the process for payout abnormality is executed in step S1002. As the process for payout abnormality, the payout abnormality flag is provided in the RWM 124 to set "1" to set the payout abnormality state. Further, the tank-ball-less command is transmitted to the sound/light control device 72, which is the sub-side control device, as a dispensing abnormality command. In this case, in the sound and light control device 72, when the payout abnormality command is received, the payout abnormality notification is executed by the display lamp section 58 and the speakers 91, 101. The payout abnormality notification may be executed by the symbol display device 41.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1001 or after the processing of step S1002 is executed, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the lower plate full command is received from the payout control device 78. As described above, the lower plate full command is transmitted from the payout control device 78 when the full detection sensor 131 detects that the lower plate 62a is full, and corresponds to a payout abnormality command.

  If the tank-ball-less command is received, the process for payout abnormality is executed in step S1004. As the process for payout abnormality, the payout abnormality flag is provided in the RWM 124 to set "1" to set the payout abnormality state. Also, the lower plate full command is transmitted to the sound/light control device 72, which is a sub-side control device, as a dispensing abnormality command. In this case, in the sound and light control device 72, when the payout abnormality command is received, the payout abnormality notification is executed by the display lamp section 58 and the speakers 91, 101. The payout abnormality notification may be executed by the symbol display device 41.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1003 or after the processing of step S1004 is executed, it is determined in step S1005 whether or not an abnormal end command is received from the payout control device 78. As described above, the abnormal termination command is transmitted from the payout control device 78 when a predetermined abnormality related to the payout of gaming balls is canceled. If the abnormal termination command is received, the processing for abnormal termination is executed in step S1006. Specifically, the payout abnormal state of the RWM 124 is cleared by clearing the payout abnormal flag to “0”.

  In the configuration for transmitting the payout abnormality command as described above as the process for payout abnormality, the payout abnormality cancellation command is transmitted to the sound and light control device 72 as the process for abnormal termination. In this case, the sound and light control device 72 ends the already-executed payout abnormality notification.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1005 or after the processing of step S1006 is executed, it is determined in step S1007 whether or not a prize ball completion command is received from the payout control device 78. As described above, the prize ball completion command is transmitted from the payout control device 78 when the prize ball is completed, and also includes information on the number of completed prize balls.

  If the prize ball completion command has not been received, the main payout state reception process is ended as it is, and if the prize ball completion command has been received, after executing the external output process of the number of prize balls in step S1008, This payout state reception processing is ended. In the external output processing of the number of prize balls, processing for performing external output for causing the management computer of the game hall to recognize the information of the number of prize balls completed this time is executed.

  The prize ball completion command may not be transmitted from the payout control device 78. Further, in the configuration, the payout control device 78 is also electrically connected to the external terminal board 81, and the external output of the information on the completion of the prize ball and the completed prize ball number is paid out without passing through the main MPU 122. It may be configured to be executed by the control device 78.

<Electrical configuration related to performance execution control>
Next, an electrical configuration related to performance control will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  As described above, the sound/light control device 72 and the display control device 128 are provided as the control devices for controlling the execution of the effect based on the instruction from the main control device 71. As shown in FIG. 24, the sound/light control device 72 includes a sound/light control board 141 on which the sub MPU 142 is mounted. The sub MPU 142 has a built-in direct ROM 144 and RWM 145 in addition to the CPU 143 which is a central processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit. The CPU 143, the direct ROM 144, and the RWM 145 are connected to each other via a bus.

  The direct ROM 144 is configured to use a memory such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory that does not require power supply from the outside for storage storage (that is, a nonvolatile storage unit) as a read-only memory. The direct ROM 144 stores various control programs and fixed value data used when executing processes according to the programs, and the CPU 143 executes processes according to the control programs stored in the direct ROM 144. Thus, the execution of the effect based on the instruction from the main control device 71 is controlled. The direct ROM 144 is relatively difficult to increase its data capacity because it is connected to the CPU 143 via the internal bus in the sub MPU 142. Specifically, the data capacity is 2M. It has become a byte.

  The RWM 145 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) such as an SRAM or a DRAM that needs to be supplied with electric power from the outside to retain the storage for both reading and writing, and allows random access and is the same. When compared with the data capacity of, the time required for reading is shorter than that of the direct ROM 144. The RWM 145 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the direct ROM 144 is executed, and has various flag storage areas and various counter storage areas. Note that it is not essential that the direct ROM 144 and the RWM 145 are integrated into one chip for the sub MPU 142, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

  The sub MPU 142 determines the content of the effect for a predetermined period based on the instruction from the main control device 71, and transmits a command according to the determined content of the effect to the display control device 128. For such a command, a signal path provided to connect the sub MPU 142 and the display MPU 162 is used.

  The display control device 128 includes a display MPU 162, a display control board 161 on which a VDP 163 provided as a drawing LSI and an image ROM 164 are mounted, and the display MPU 162 has a display effect in a predetermined period according to a command received from the sub MPU 142. Is determined, and an internal command corresponding to the determined content of the display effect is periodically transmitted to the VDP 163.

  The VDP 163 reads out image data from the image ROM 164 according to the internal command received from the display MPU 162, and uses the read image data to create drawing data at the update timing of each image. Then, a drawing signal corresponding to the created drawing data is output to the symbol display device 41 to display an image corresponding to each update timing on the display surface G of the symbol display device 41.

  Returning to the description of the sound/light control device 72, when the sub MPU 142 determines the content of the effect in the predetermined period, the sub MPU 142 controls the light emission of the display lamp unit 58 as well as the display control device 128. In this case, in FIG. 24, it is described that the sub MPU 142 and the display lamp unit 58 are directly connected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and driving is performed between the sub MPU 142 and the display lamp unit 58. A circuit may intervene or a relay board may intervene.

  The sub-MPU 142 executes drive control of the speakers 91 and 101 when the content of the effect in the predetermined period is determined. The sound output LSI 146 and the common ROM 147 are used for the drive control of the speakers 91 and 101.

  The common ROM 147 is configured to use, as a read-only memory, a memory such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage. Since the common ROM 147 is not directly connected to the CPU 143 but is externally attached to the sound output LSI 146, it is easier to increase its data capacity than the direct ROM 144. And specifically, the data capacity thereof is 1 Gbit. However, this data capacity is arbitrary and may be 500 M bits or 4 G bits.

  The sound output LSI 146 includes an I/F 151, a register 152, a sound data processing unit 153, a DAC 154, and a data transfer unit 155, and outputs sound from the speakers 91 and 101 according to the data transmitted from the sub MPU 142. Execute control to output.

  The I/F 151 is an interface for the sound output LSI 146 to communicate with the sub MPU 142 via the bus B1 provided as a signal path group for bidirectional communication. The bus B1 connected to the I/F 151 is composed of eight signal paths J1 to J8, and data is transmitted and received between the sub MPU 142 and the sound output LSI 146 via the signal paths J1 to J8. Be seen.

  The register 152 has a function as a storage unit for temporarily storing various data used in the sound output LSI 146, and uses a memory that requires external power supply for storage as a read/write memory. Is configured to. In addition, random access is possible, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is shorter than that for the direct ROM 144 and the common ROM 147.

  The register 152 has a data capacity of many bytes so that a plurality of data can be simultaneously stored and held, and has a data capacity of a unit of kilobytes or megabytes. Specifically, it has a data capacity of about 10 kilobytes.

  The register 152 is provided with a plurality of parameter areas and sequence data areas. The parameter area stores parameter data necessary for outputting a melody or a sound effect, and also stores parameter data necessary for outputting a voice. By providing a plurality of parameter areas, it is possible to simultaneously output a plurality of sounds from the speakers 91 and 101. Sequence data is stored in the area for sequence data.

  The sound data processing unit 153 converts the sequence data and the parameter data transmitted from the sub MPU 142 and stored in the register 152 so that the sequence data and the parameter data can be used for outputting sound, and the contents of the conversion result and the common ROM 147. It has a function of creating digital tone data by using the tone data read from the. By the way, the sequence data includes time data indicating the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds, and the parameter data includes data that determines the pitch, volume, and timbre of a sound at a predetermined timing. Has been.

  Further, the sound data processing unit 153 has a function of a plurality of sound generation channels so as to be able to output a plurality of different sounds at the same time, and synthesizes the digital sound data created for each sound generation channel to synthesize the digital synthesized sound data. Has the function of creating. Although a plurality of sound generation channels have a function of 16 channels, the number of channels is arbitrary. Also, by using virtual tracks, it is possible to use a larger number of tracks (for example, 64 tracks) than the actual number of sound generation channels, but it is also possible to employ a configuration in which such virtual tracks are not used.

  The DAC 154 is a digital/analog converter. The DAC 154 has a function of outputting a sound signal obtained by converting the digital musical sound data or the digital synthesized musical sound data created by the sound data processing unit 153 into an analog signal to the speakers 91 and 101 as an analog audio signal. That is, it has a function of generating a sound signal from sound data.

  The speakers 91 and 101 are connected to the DAC 154 via an amplifier 171 that amplifies a sound signal. The amplifier 171 is connected to the output side of the DAC 154 in the sound/light control board 141, and the speakers 91 and 101 are individually connected to the amplifier 171 via separate speaker paths 135. The sound signal output from the DAC 154 is amplified by the amplifier 171, and then input to the speakers 91 and 101.

  The amplifier 171 amplifies an analog signal as a sound signal, and the amplifier 171 and the speakers 91 and 101 are connected by line terminals. Further, in FIG. 24, the upper speaker 91 and the lower speaker 101 are connected to the amplifier 171 one by one, but two upper speakers 91 are connected to the amplifier 171. In addition, the two lower speakers 101 are connected to each other.

  The amplifier 171 is capable of outputting different sound signals to the speakers 91 and 101, respectively, which allows the speakers 91 and 101 to output different kinds of sounds. There is. For example, when a sound signal for outputting the effect sound is output from the DAC 154, a sound signal for outputting the middle and high tones of the effect sound is output to the upper speaker 91, and a low sound lower than the middle and high sound is output. A sound signal for causing it to be output to the lower speaker 101. As a result, the upper speaker 91 outputs a medium-tone sound effect, and the lower speaker 101 outputs a low-tone effect sound.

  Further, the amplifier 171 can individually set the amplification factor of the sound signal to be output to each of the speakers 91 and 101, so that the sound is output from the speakers 91 and 101 at different volumes. It is possible to output. For example, the amplification factor of the sound signal output to the upper speaker 91 is made higher than the amplification factor of the sound signal output to the lower speaker 101. As a result, a sound with a louder volume than that of the lower speaker 101 is output from the upper speaker 91.

  The amplifier 171 has a pre-unit 172 as a pre-amplifying unit and a power unit 173 as a power amplifying unit, and the power unit 173 is arranged on the output side of the pre-unit 172. The pre-unit 172 has a function of amplifying the signal level of the sound signal input from the DAC 154 to the amplifier 171 to the line level, a function of outputting different sound signals corresponding to the speakers 91 and 101, and the like. And outputs a sound signal processed by these functions to the power unit 173.

  The power unit 173 has a function of further amplifying the volume level of the sound signal amplified to the line level by the pre-unit 172 according to the position of the volume switch 111, and the sound signal processed by this amplification function is processed. It outputs to each speaker 91 and 101. The power unit 173 individually amplifies the sound signal corresponding to each of the speakers 91 and 101, and individually outputs the amplified sound signal to each of the speakers 91 and 101.

  Here, when the volume level of each sound signal input from the amplifier 171 to the speakers 91 and 101 exceeds the allowable input level of the speakers 91 and 101, the waveform of the sound signal is distorted, which causes the speakers 91 and 101 to be distorted. Sometimes the sound output from sounds like clipping. It may be assumed that when the rated input level or the maximum input level of the speakers 91, 101 is exceeded, the output sound sounds like cracked.

  Therefore, the amplifier 171 is connected with a sound breakage detection circuit 175 that detects that sound breaks occur in the sounds output from the speakers 91 and 101. The sound breakage detection circuit 175 detects that the volume level of the sound signal input from the amplifier 171 to the speakers 91 and 101 exceeds a predetermined reference level. It is provided individually corresponding to each.

  The reference level is individually set for each sound breakage detection circuit 175 in accordance with the allowable input level of the corresponding speaker 91, 101. The reference level is set equal to or slightly lower than the allowable input level of the speakers 91 and 101, for example. In this case, the sound breakage detection circuit 175 detects that the volume level of the sound signal input to the corresponding speaker 91, 101 exceeds the allowable input level of the speaker 91, 101.

  The operation knob 112 is connected to each sound breakage detection circuit 175. In the sound break detection circuit 175, the reference level is increased or decreased by operating the operation knob 112. In this case, the hall manager or the like variably sets the reference level of the sound breakage detection circuit 175 by operating the operation knob 112 in accordance with the allowable input level of the speaker 91 to which the sound breakup detection circuit 175 corresponds. Is possible.

  The sound breakage detection circuit 175 acquires the maximum value of the sound volume level of the sound signal as a peak value, updates the peak value at a predetermined cycle, and compares the peak value and the reference level each time to obtain the sound volume level. Is a circuit that detects that the voltage exceeds the reference level. The detailed configuration of the sound breakage detection circuit 175 will be described later.

  Two upper speakers 91 and two lower speakers 101 are connected to the amplifier 171, and a sound breakage detection circuit 175 is individually provided for each of the speakers 91 and 101. On the other hand, in FIG. 24, the upper speaker 91 and the lower speaker 101 are omitted and shown one by one, and only the sound breakage detection circuit 175 corresponding to the speakers 91 and 101 is shown. That is, actually, there are four sound breakage detection circuits 175 connected to the amplifier 171, but only two sound breakup detection circuits 175 are shown in FIG.

  Each sound breakage detection circuit 175 is mounted on the sound/light control board 141, and is connected to the amplifier 171 via each branch path 176 branched from each speaker path 135. In this case, each branch path 176 is connected to the input side of each sound breakage detection circuit 175. The sound crack detection circuits 175 are connected to the amplifier 171 in parallel with the speakers 91 and 101, and the sound signal output from the amplifier 171 is input to the speakers 91 and 101 via the speaker path 135. At the same time, it is also input to the sound breakage detection circuit 175 corresponding to the speakers 91 and 101 via the speaker path 135 and the branch path 176. Therefore, the sound break detection circuit 175 performs sound break detection for the sound signals input to the speakers 91 and 101.

  Each sound crack detection circuit 175 is individually connected to the sub MPU 142 via the output side path 178, and outputs a detection signal to the sub MPU 142. The sub-MPU 142 individually determines, based on the detection signal of each sound break detection circuit 175, whether or not sound breaks occur in the output sound of each of the speakers 91 and 101. For example, when each sound crack detection circuit 175 detects that the volume level of the sound signal is higher than the reference level, the sound crack detection signal 175 outputs the sound crack signal as a detection signal because the sound crack may occur, and the sub MPU 142 outputs the sound. When the cracking signal is received, it is determined that the sound output from the speakers 91 and 101 has sound cracking. The sound cracking signal corresponds to an excess signal.

  Further, the volume switch 111 and the amplifier 171 are connected to the sub MPU 142. The volume switch 111 is connected to the input side of the sub MPU 142 and outputs a detection signal to the sub MPU 142. The sub MPU 142 determines the position of the volume switch 111 based on the detection signal of the volume switch 111.

  The amplifier 171 is connected to the output side of the sub MPU 142 and its operation is controlled by the sub MPU 142. The sub MPU 142 sets the type of output sound for each speaker 91, 101 by controlling the operation of the pre-unit 172 of the amplifier 171, and controls the operation of the power unit 173 for each speaker 91, 101. The amplification factor of the power unit 173 is set, and thereby the volume of each speaker 91, 101 is adjusted.

  The sub MPU 142 sets the amplification factor of the power unit 173 according to the position of the volume switch 111. Here, in the present embodiment, the position of the volume switch 111 can be switched to the scale F in addition to the scales 0 to 5, and the position is different from the conventional volume switch that does not have the scale F as a position. The amplification factor of the power unit 173 corresponding to each is different.

  First, a conventional volume switch having no scale F will be described. In the case of a conventional volume switch, for example, when the position of the volume switch is on the scale 5, the sub MPU 142 maximizes the amplification factor of the power unit 173 so that the sound signal is amplified up to the rated output of the power unit 173. When the value (100%) is set and the scale is 3 (3/5 of the maximum value), the amplification factor of the power unit 173 is set so that the sound signal is amplified up to 60% of the rated output of the power unit 173. For example, it is set to 60% of the maximum value. Further, when the position of the volume switch is on the scale 0 (sound output stop), the amplification factor of the power unit 173 is set to zero in order to stop the sound output from the speakers 91 and 101.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scales 1 to 5, the output volume from the speakers 91 and 101 is set to a level at which sound cracking does not easily occur. When the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F, the volume output from the speakers 91 and 101 is set to a level at which sound breakage easily occurs. That is, when the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F, the sound output from the speakers 91 and 101 is allowed to break to some extent.

  When the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scales 1 to 5, the sub-MPU 142 sets the amplification factor of the power unit 173 to be smaller than that of each position of the conventional volume switch, and thereby the sound crack is less likely to occur. ing. For example, when the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale 5, the amplification factor of the power unit 173 is set to 60% of the maximum value (a value corresponding to the scale 3 in the conventional volume switch) and is on the scale 3. In this case, the amplification factor of the power unit 173 is set to 36% of the maximum value.

  On the other hand, when the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F, the sub MPU 142 sets the amplification factor of the power unit 173 to be larger than that when the volume switch 111 is on the scale 5, whereby the scale 5 is set. Sound cracking is more likely to occur than in. For example, when the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F, the amplification factor of the power unit 173 is set to the maximum value (the value corresponding to the scale 5 in the conventional volume switch). Incidentally, the amplification factor of the power unit 173 may be set to a value larger than the maximum value (for example, 120% of the maximum value) depending on the performance of the speakers 91 and 101.

  Here, in addition to the position of the volume switch 111, the sub MPU 142 sets the amplification factor of the power unit 173 according to the detection result of the sound breakage detection circuit 175. The sub MPU 142 lowers the amplification factor of the power unit 173 when it is determined that the sound output from the speakers 91 and 101 has sound cracking (when a sound cracking signal is input from the sound cracking detection circuit 175). Then, the volume level of the sound signal input to the speakers 91 and 101 is reduced, whereby it is possible to eliminate the sound crack generated in the output sound from the speakers 91 and 101.

  When the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale 0, the sub-MPU 142 sets the amplification factor of the power unit 173 to stop the output of the sound from the speakers 91 and 101, as in the conventional volume switch. Set to zero. In this case, it goes without saying that sound cracking does not occur.

  The data transfer unit 155 is connected to the common ROM 147 via a bus B2 provided as a signal path group for bidirectional communication, and has a function of transferring the data read from the common ROM 147 to the register 152. ing. The bus B2 provided between the data transfer unit 155 and the common ROM 147 is composed of 16 signal paths, and the number of signal paths is greater than that of the bus B1 between the sub MPU 142 and the I/F 151. It is a large number. The data communication speed between the data transfer unit 155 and the common ROM 147 is higher than the data communication speed between the sub MPU 142 and the I/F 151. In the data transfer unit 155, the sound data required for outputting the sound is read from the common ROM 147 based on the data converted from the sequence data and the parameter data in the sound data processing unit 153, and is stored in the register 152.

  Here, the data transfer unit 155 not only has the function of transferring the sound data necessary for the sound data processing unit 153 to the register 152, but also reads the necessary data for the sub MPU 142 from the common ROM 147 and stores the data in the register 152. It has a function of transferring the data stored in the register 152 to the sub MPU 142. The configuration related to such data transfer will be described below.

<Data structure of direct ROM 144 and common ROM 147>
First, the data configurations of the direct ROM 144 and the common ROM 147 will be described with reference to FIG. 25A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the direct ROM 144, and FIG. 25B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the common ROM 147.

  As shown in FIG. 25A, in the direct ROM 144, the program and processing data (1), the program and the processing for executing the effect control processing and the notification control processing in the CPU 143 of the sub MPU 142. .., program, and processing data (P) are stored in advance. These programs and processing data include a data table used to execute each effect and notification, and sequence data and parameter data to be provided to the sound output LSI 146. All the programs and processing data necessary for the CPU 143 to execute the effect control processing and the notification control processing are stored in the direct ROM 144.

  The direct ROM 144 controls not only the program and processing data (1), the program and processing data (2),..., The program and processing data (P) but also the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58. Light emission data (1), light emission data (2),..., Light emission data (Q) used for are stored in advance. In each of these light emission data, information on the type of the light emitting unit to be turned on, the lighting period, and the lighting order in the display lamp unit 58 is set in a predetermined effect period, and the contents of these light emitting patterns are set. It differs depending on the type of each light emission data. The respective light emission data stored in the direct ROM 144 have different target light emission control periods and different light emission pattern contents.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25B, sound data (1), sound data (2),..., Used in the common ROM 147 for outputting a predetermined sound from the speakers 91, 101. Sound data (S) is stored in advance. Each of these sound data includes waveform data obtained by sampling a melody or sound actually sounded by an instrument corresponding to various tones, and for a melody with lyrics, depending on an instrument corresponding to various tones. It includes waveform data obtained by sampling the sounded melody and voice. Further, the effect data and the notification sound are formed by these sound data, and all these sound data are stored in the common ROM 147.

  The common ROM 147 stores not only sound data (1), sound data (2),... Sound data (S), but also light emission data (Q+1), light emission data (Q+2),..., Light emission data (R). ) Is stored in advance. The respective emission data have different emission control periods of interest and different emission pattern contents.

  As described above, the light emission data used in the sub MPU 142 is stored not only in the direct ROM 144 directly connected to the CPU 143 of the sub MPU 142 via the bus but also in the common ROM 147 connected to the sound output LSI 146. Remembered In other words, the light emission data is distributed and stored in the direct ROM 144 and the common ROM 147.

<Sound breakage detection circuit 175>
Next, the configuration of the sound breakage detection circuit 175 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a circuit diagram showing an electrical configuration of the sound breakage detection circuit 175.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the sound breakage detection circuit 175 has a peak hold unit 182 that holds (holds) the peak value of the sound signal input from the amplifier 171 as a hold value Vph, and a hold value Vph of the peak hold unit 182. It has a reset unit 183 for updating and a comparison unit 184 for comparing the hold value Vph of the peak hold unit 182 with the reference voltage Va as a reference level. As already described with reference to FIG. 24, in the sound breakage detection circuit 175 connected to the amplifier 171 and the sub MPU 142, the peak hold unit 182 is connected to the amplifier 171 via the branch path 176, and the comparison unit 184 outputs. It is connected to the sub MPU 142 via the side path 178.

  The peak hold unit 182 has a hold capacitor 191 as a charging unit that is charged by a sound signal, and a diode 192 that is arranged in the forward direction on the upstream side of the hold capacitor 191. The diode 192 is a rectifying element whose output side (cathode side) is connected to the hold capacitor 191, and regulates reverse current flow from the hold capacitor 191 to the amplifier 171. In other words, the diode 192 restricts the current on the negative side of the sound signal from flowing into the hold capacitor 191, while permitting the current on the positive side to flow into the hold capacitor 191. In this case, the hold capacitor 191 is charged by the current on the positive side of the sound signal, and the charging voltage becomes the peak value of the volume level of the sound signal.

  The peak hold unit 182 has a buffer unit 193 that performs impedance conversion, in addition to the hold capacitor 191 and the diode 192. The buffer unit 193 is a voltage follower (a non-inverting amplifier circuit having an amplification factor of 1) including an operational amplifier 194. In the buffer unit 193, the input impedance is sufficiently increased and the output impedance is It is small enough. Therefore, in the configuration in which the sound breakage detection circuit 175 is connected to the output side of the amplifier 171, it is suppressed that the voltage of the sound signal (input voltage Vi) increases or decreases due to the output impedance of the amplifier 171.

  In the operational amplifier 194 of the buffer unit 193, the non-inverting input terminal (+ input terminal) is connected to the amplifier 171, and the inverting input terminal (− input terminal) and the output terminal are connected via the feedback path 195. In this case, in the voltage follower, the + input terminal and the − input terminal of the operational amplifier 194 are in a virtual short circuit (virtual short) state, so that the − input terminal has the same potential as the + input terminal. Therefore, when the input voltage Vi of the sound signal is applied to the + input terminal, the input voltage Vi is applied to the − input terminal and the feedback path 195.

  In the peak hold unit 182, the diode 192 is incorporated in the buffer unit 193. The diode 192 is arranged between the operational amplifier 194 and the feedback path 195 in the buffer unit 193, its input side (anode side) is connected to the output side of the operational amplifier 194, and its output side (cathode side) is the feedback path 195. It is connected to the (hold capacitor 191).

  Here, since the diode 192 is a rectifying element having a forward voltage, for example, the diode 192 is not incorporated in the buffer unit 193 but is provided between the buffer unit 193 and the hold capacitor 191. In this case (provided on the downstream side of the feedback path 195), even if the sound signal is input to the peak hold unit 182, the input voltage Vi of the sound signal is the forward voltage of the diode 192 (for example, 0.6 V). If it is smaller than (1), current does not flow in the diode 192 and the hold capacitor 191 is not charged. That is, the hold capacitor 191 cannot hold the peak value of the sound signal.

  On the other hand, as described above, in the configuration in which the diode 192 is incorporated in the buffer unit 193, even if the input voltage Vi of the sound signal is smaller than the forward voltage of the diode 192, the input voltage Vi of the feedback path 195 is not satisfied. Since it is applied to the hold capacitor 191 through the hold capacitor 191, the hold capacitor 191 holds the peak value of the sound signal as the hold value Vph.

  The comparison unit 184 includes a voltage generation unit 201 that generates the reference voltage Va, and a comparator 202 as a comparison unit that compares the hold value Vph held by the peak hold unit 182 with the reference voltage Va. In the sound break detection circuit 175, the reference level is set to the reference voltage Va, the reference voltage Va is variably set according to the operating state of the operation knob 112, and the voltage generator 201 sets the reference voltage Va to a predetermined voltage value. It has the function of holding. That is, the voltage generator 201 has a function of holding the voltage value of the reference voltage Va at a value according to the operation state of the operation knob 112.

  It is preferable that the voltage value of the reference voltage Va is set by the operation knob 112 to a value according to the allowable input level of the speakers 91 and 101. In the present embodiment, the voltage value of the reference voltage Va is set to the same value as the allowable input level of the speakers 91 and 101. Incidentally, the voltage value of the reference voltage Va may be set to a value larger or smaller than the allowable input level as long as the error with the allowable input levels of the speakers 91 and 101 does not become too large.

  The comparator 202 has an inverting input terminal (−input terminal) connected to the peak hold unit 182 and a non-inverting input terminal (+input terminal) connected to the voltage generation unit 201, and these input terminals Compare the input voltage values. In the comparator 202, the − input terminal is connected to the hold capacitor 191 of the peak hold unit 182, and the + input terminal is connected to the voltage generation unit 201.

  In this case, the hold value Vph of the sound signal is input to the-input terminal from the peak hold unit 182, and the reference voltage Va is input to the + input terminal from the voltage generation unit 201. Therefore, when the reference voltage Va is higher than the hold value Vph, the comparator 202 (sound break detection circuit 175) outputs a HI level signal to the sub MPU 142, and the reference voltage Va is lower than the hold value Vph. In this case, a LOW level signal is output to the sub MPU 142. Therefore, the LOW level signal output from the comparator 202 is output from the sound split detection circuit 175 to the sub MPU 142 as the above-described sound split signal.

  The operational amplifier 194 and the comparator 202 are both comparison elements that compare the signals input to the + input terminal and the − input terminal, but the operational amplifier 194 is formed on the assumption that it is incorporated in a feedback circuit. On the other hand, the comparator 202 is formed without assuming that it is incorporated in the feedback circuit. Specifically, the operational amplifier 194 has a phase compensation capacitor for preventing oscillation, but the comparator 202 does not have a phase compensation capacitor for oscillation prevention. Is more responsive. That is, the time required for the operational amplifier 194 from the input of the signal to the output is shorter than that of the comparator 202.

  The voltage generator 201 includes a shunt regulator 203 that holds the reference voltage Va at a predetermined voltage value, a series resistor R0 that is connected in series to the shunt regulator 203, and a first resistor R1 and a second resistor that divide the reference voltage Va. R2 and. The shunt regulator 203 has a reference, a cathode, and an anode, and the cathode is connected to the +V terminal 208 which applies the terminal voltage Vcc via the series resistor R0. The + input terminal of the comparator 202 is connected between the series resistor R0 and the shunt regulator 203.

  The shunt regulator 203 is a known voltage regulator including an operational amplifier and a transistor. In the shunt regulator 203, the reference voltage Vref is applied to the reference and the reference current Iref flows. However, the reference current Iref flowing through the reference is extremely smaller than the currents flowing through the cathode and the anode.

  The first resistor R1 and the second resistor R2 are connected in series with each other, and the opposite side of the first resistor R1 from the second resistor R2 is connected to the + input terminal of the comparator 202. In this case, the first resistor R1 and the second resistor R2 are arranged in parallel to the shunt regulator 203 with respect to the comparator 202, while the first resistor R1 and the second resistor R2 are placed between the first resistor R1 and the second resistor R2. The reference of the shunt regulator 203 is connected to.

In the voltage generator 201, the reference voltage Va input to the comparator 202 is
Va=(R1/R2+1)×Vref+Iref×R1 (1)
It is calculated by the formula. Here, as described above, since Iref is sufficiently small, the reference voltage Va may be calculated with Iref set to zero. Note that, for example, R1=10 kΩ, R2=10 kΩ, Va≈2.5 V, the applied voltage VR1 to R1 is VR1=1.25 V, and the applied voltage to R2 is VR2=1.25 V.

  The shunt regulator 203 operates normally because the current flowing into the cathode is larger than the minimum input value required for operation, and the terminal current Ii supplied from the +V terminal 208 is the minimum input value flowing into the cathode. It should be set to be larger than. The value of the terminal current Ii flowing into the voltage generator 201 is defined by the series resistance R0, the terminal voltage Vcc, and the reference voltage Va.

  Note that, for example, Vcc=5V and R0=100Ω. In this case, the terminal voltage Vcc applied to the +V terminal 208 generates the reference voltage Va smaller than the terminal voltage Vcc. The series resistor R0 regulates the value of the current flowing to the cathode of the shunt regulator 203, and regulates the flow of overcurrent to the cathode of the shunt regulator 203.

  In the voltage generator 201, the voltage value of the reference voltage Va can be variably set. Specifically, the second resistor R2 is a variable resistor, and the reference voltage Va is changed by changing the resistance value of the second resistor R2. The resistance value of the second resistor R2 is changed in accordance with the operation of the operation knob 112. For example, the operation knob 112 is attached to the second resistor R2, and the resistance value of the second resistor R2 increases or decreases in accordance with the rotation of the operation knob 112.

  As described above, the operation knob 112 is provided on the outer peripheral surface of the sound/light control device 72 (see FIG. 10 and the like). Therefore, even if the work of disassembling the sound and light control device 72 and exposing the sound and light control board 141 is not performed, the back pack unit 15 is opened to the inner frame 13 and the sound and light control device 72 is moved to the pachinko machine. The operation knob 112 can be operated by exposing the operation knob 112 on the back side. That is, it is possible to set the reference voltage Va as the reference level according to the allowable input levels of the corresponding speakers 91 and 101 without replacing the second resistor R2 or disassembling the sound/light control device 72.

  Since the reference voltage Va is calculated by the above equation (1), it becomes large when the second resistance R2 is made small and becomes small when the second resistance R2 is made large. That is, when it is desired to increase the reference voltage Va, the operation knob 112 is operated so that the second resistance R2 is decreased, and when the reference voltage Va is desired to be decreased, the operation knob 112 is increased. To operate.

  In the voltage generator 201, the first resistor R1 may be a variable resistor. In this case, the reference voltage Va increases as the first resistance R1 increases and decreases as the first resistance R1 decreases. That is, if at least one of the first resistor R1 and the second resistor R2 is a variable resistor, the reference voltage Va can be changed by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor. However, when the first resistor R1 is increased, the power loss due to the reference current Iref flowing through the first resistor R1 increases. Therefore, in order to increase the reference voltage Va, it is preferable to decrease the second resistance R2 instead of increasing the first resistance R1. Therefore, it is preferable that the second resistor R2 is a variable resistor instead of the first resistor R1.

  The reset unit 183 includes a discharge unit 211 that discharges the hold capacitor 191, and a switch unit 212 that switches the discharge unit 211 to a conductive state or a non-conductive state with respect to the hold capacitor 191. The discharging unit 211 has a discharging resistor 213, which is grounded and connected to the hold capacitor 191 via the switch unit 212. Therefore, the switch portion 212 brings the discharge resistor 213 into conduction with the hold capacitor 191, so that the hold capacitor 191 is grounded via the discharge resistor 213.

  The switch unit 212 is a relay such as an electromagnetic relay. The switch unit 212 includes a changeover switch 214 for connecting one of the discharge unit 211 and the comparator 202 to the hold capacitor 191, and a relay coil 215 for operating the changeover switch 214. The holding capacitor 191, the discharging unit 211, and the comparator 202 are connected to each other. When the switch unit 212 is in the OFF state because the current does not flow in the relay coil 215, the changeover switch 214 brings the hold capacitor 191 and the comparator 202 into the conductive state, while the hold capacitor 191 and the discharge unit 211. And cut off. Further, when the switch unit 212 is in the ON state due to the current flowing through the relay coil 215, the changeover switch 214 causes the hold capacitor 191 and the comparator 202 to be in the cutoff state while the hold capacitor 191 and the discharge are discharged. The part 211 is brought into conduction.

  In the reset unit 183, the oscillation resistance 218 is connected to the relay coil 215, and the magnitude of the current flowing through the relay coil 215 is defined by the oscillation resistance 218. In this case, the resistance value of the oscillation resistor 218 is set to such a value that the current flowing through the relay coil 215 can operate the changeover switch 214 by the relay coil 215 and does not cause an overcurrent to the relay coil 215. Is set to be.

  When the switch unit 212 is in the OFF state, the hold capacitor 191 is charged, and the charged voltage is input to the negative input terminal of the comparator 202 as the hold value Vph, and the comparator 202 outputs the hold value Vph and the reference voltage Va. A comparison is made. On the other hand, when the switch unit 212 is in the ON state, a current flows from the hold capacitor 191 to the discharge unit 211 via the changeover switch 214, whereby the hold capacitor 191 is discharged.

  An oscillation circuit 217 that outputs an oscillation signal that oscillates at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec) is connected to the relay coil 215. When the signal output from the oscillation circuit 217 is at the HI level, a current flows through the relay coil 215 to turn on the switch unit 212, and when the signal is at the LOW level, no current flows through the relay coil 215 and the switch unit 212 is turned on. Is turned off. Therefore, the discharge of the hold capacitor 191 is repeated in the oscillation cycle of the oscillation signal.

  The period during which the oscillation signal is at the HI level is defined by the size of the oscillation resistor 218. Here, a period during which the oscillation signal is at the HI level is a predetermined discharge period (for example, 0.6 msec) during which the hold capacitor 191 is discharged, and during this discharge period, the charging voltage of the hold capacitor 191 is It is preferable that the period is a period required for the discharge to reach zero. Therefore, the resistance value of the oscillation resistor 218 is set according to the size of the hold capacitor 191.

  Here, a detection mode when the sound signal is input in the sound breakage detection circuit 175 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining a detection mode of the sound breakage detection circuit 175. In FIG. 27, (a) shows the transition of the input voltage Vi of the sound signal input to the sound breakage detection circuit 175, (b) shows the transition of the output signal of the oscillation circuit 217, and (c) shows the transition. The transition of the hold value Vph of the hold capacitor 191 is shown, and the transition of the output signal of the comparator 202 is shown in (d).

  When a sound signal as shown in FIG. 27A is output from the amplifier 171 to the speakers 91, 101 and the sound breakage detection circuit 175, a sound corresponding to the waveform and volume level of the sound signal is output to the speaker 91, 101. While being output from 101, the sound signal is input to the sound crack detection circuit 175 as the input voltage Vi. Further, as shown in FIG. 27B, the HI level signal is output from the oscillation circuit 217 in the cycle T.

  As shown in FIG. 27C, in the peak hold unit 182, the maximum value (peak value) of the input voltage Vi of the sound signal in the cycle T is held as the hold value Vph. In the cycle T, the output signal of the oscillation circuit 217 becomes the HI level, the hold capacitor 191 is discharged, and the hold value Vph of the peak hold unit 182 is reset to zero. After that, when the output signal of the oscillation circuit 217 becomes LOW level, the discharge of the hold capacitor 191 is stopped, and the maximum value of the volume level of the sound signal is held as the hold value Vph. Then, when the period T elapses, the hold capacitor 191 is discharged again, and the hold value Vph is reset again to zero.

  As shown in FIG. 27D, the output signal of the comparator 202 is set to the HI level when the hold value Vph is smaller than the reference voltage Va, and is set to the LOW level when the hold value Vph is larger than the reference voltage Va. It Therefore, in the sound crack detection circuit 175, the hold level Vph is larger than the reference voltage Va by outputting a LOW level signal from the comparator 202, that is, the input voltage Vi (volume level) of the sound signal is the speaker. This means that the comparison unit 184 has output a signal indicating that the allowable input levels of 91 and 101 have been exceeded.

  Note that, for example, in the configuration in which the sound breakage detection circuit 175 does not include the peak hold unit 182 and the sound signal is input to the-input terminal of the comparator 202, the sound signal sampled at a predetermined cycle in the comparator 202. The input voltage Vi and the reference voltage Va are compared. In this case, the sampled input voltage Vi is not always the maximum value (peak value) in the predetermined period due to the vibration of the sound signal, and the input voltage Vi of the sound signal is less than the reference voltage Va. It is considered that the detection accuracy of exceeding is low. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the input voltage Vi of the sound signal input to the comparator 202 is the peak value (hold value Vph), the input voltage Vi of the sound signal exceeds the reference voltage Va. The detection accuracy of the presence is improved.

<Various processes executed by the sub MPU 142>
Next, the processing executed by the sub MPU 142 based on the program will be described.

  The sub MPU 142 repeatedly executes the notification and effect control processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28 in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). Here, in the notification and effect control processing, in the sound break detection circuit 175, the hold value is held at the same cycle as the update cycle (oscillation cycle of the oscillation circuit 217) of the hold value (peak value of the sound signal volume level) of the peak hold unit 182. Executed just before the value is updated. In other words, the hold value is updated continuously after the notification and the effect control process are executed. In addition, in a stage before executing the notification and effect control processing, a program for executing the effect and effect control processing is directly read from the ROM 144.

  In the notification and effect control process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether an informing command or an effect command is received from the main control device 71. Examples of the notification system commands include the magnet detection command, illegal prize winning command, radio wave detection command, tank ball no command, and bottom plate full command, which have already been described. Examples include a combination with a type command, a final stop command, an opening command, an open command, a close command, and an ending command. When the notification system command or the production system command is received, the process proceeds to step S1102.

  In step S1102, a data table read process is executed. In the reading process, the data table corresponding to the notification system command or the effect system command received this time is read directly from the ROM 144. As already described in the description of FIG. 25A, the data table is stored as the program and the processing data in the direct ROM 144, and a plurality of types are set according to the type of notification or effect. Then, the sub MPU 142 executes light emission control and sound output control according to the type of the notification system command or the production system command by referring to this data table and executing the processing defined therein.

  Specifically, in the data table, the outline of the corresponding notification system command or effect system command is determined in accordance with the passage of time, and the sub MPU 142 refers to the data table to determine the emission data to be read. Information on type, information on type and content of light emission data to be executed, information on type of sequence data and parameter data to be instructed to output is grasped. Incidentally, the sub MPU 142 uses the update of the pointer of the data table to identify the information to be referred to in the data table at each processing timing.

  In a succeeding step S1103, output processing of the display system command is executed. In the output process, the display system command corresponding to the data table read in step S1102 in a one-to-one correspondence is directly read from the ROM 144, and the read display system command is output to the display control device 128. As a result, the display control device 128 can display an image corresponding to the notification related to the execution instruction this time on the symbol display device 41. The display commands are stored in the direct ROM 144 as programs and processing data.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1101, or if the process of step S1103 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined based on the information in the data table whether or not it is the execution timing of the sound output control. If it is the execution timing of the sound output control, the sequence data and the parameter data of the sound output control object this time are read from the program and the processing data of the direct ROM 144 in step S1105, and the read in step S1106. The sequence data and the parameter data are transmitted to the sound output LSI 146 via the bus B1. In this case, the parameter data and the sequence data transmitted to the sound output LSI 146 are stored in the register 152 of the sound output LSI 146.

  In step S1107, it is determined whether or not the effect processing of the sound output control is to be executed. Here, it is determined whether or not the data table read from the direct ROM 144 corresponds to the effect system command, and if it corresponds to the effect system command, it is determined to execute the effect process. When performing the effect process, the process proceeds to step S1108, and a hold command handling process for handling the hold command output from the main control device 71 is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1104, a negative determination is made in step S1107, or if the processing of step S1108 is executed, the flow proceeds to step S1109, and volume setting processing is performed. In the volume setting process, the volume level of the sound signal is set by setting the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 (power unit 173). A detailed description of steps S1108 and S1109 will be given later.

  In step S1110, it is determined whether the sound output signal is being received. The sound output signal is a signal that is periodically output from the sound output LSI 146 via the bus B1 in a situation where the sound output LSI 146 is able to output the sound according to the output instruction from the sub MPU 142. The sound output signal is regularly monitored by a process different from the notification and effect control process. Then, if the sound outputting signal is not received in the situation where it should have been received, it is determined in step S1110 that the sound outputting signal is not received.

  When the sound output signal is received, an affirmative determination is made in step S1110, and the present notification and effect control processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the sound output signal is not received, the non-output processing is executed in step S1111, and then the main notification and effect control processing is ended. In the process at the time of non-output, a process for informing that the sound output is in a situation where it cannot be performed satisfactorily is executed. As the notification process, for example, a configuration in which a predetermined light emitting unit emits light in a predetermined mode is conceivable. In addition to or instead of this, an error command is output to the display control device 128 to cause the symbol display device 41 to output. A configuration that causes an error display can be considered.

<Hold command handling>
In the present embodiment, when a sound break occurs in the speakers 91 and 101, it is possible to perform a sound break effect using the sound break as an effect. For example, when the variation display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is any one of the super reach A to C, the lottery process of whether or not to execute the sound splitting effect is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 25( a ), the direct ROM 144 stores a lottery table for sound cracking effects (sound cracking effect lottery information group) in advance. The direct ROM 144 has a lottery table storage area (lottery information group storage means), and the lottery table for the sound cracking effect is stored in the lottery table storage area. In this case, whether or not to perform the sound splitting effect by comparing the lottery table for the sound splitting effect with the value (numerical information) of the lottery counter for the sound splitting effect stored in various counter areas of the RWM 145. Is determined.

  As a lottery table for the sound cracking effect, a big hit result and a miss result table are directly stored in the ROM 144, and the lottery table corresponding to the big hit result has a sound cracking effect more than the lottery table corresponding to the miss result. Is easier to select. As a result, the expectation level of the jackpot is set to be higher when the sound cracking effect is performed than when the sound cracking effect is not performed.

  The details of the process of executing the sound breaking effect will be described later, and thus the sound breaking effect will be briefly described here.

  When the sound breakage detection circuit 175 detects the occurrence of sound breaks when the sound breakage effect is not selected, the volume is limited to a state in which the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is limited. The output volume is reduced, and it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of sound cracks. In this case, the volume limit state is continued until the game time which is being performed at the timing when the occurrence of sound crack is detected is completed.

  On the other hand, in the case of winning the sound cracking effect, the sound cracking that has occurred is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) shorter than the required period for one game, and then the sound volume is restricted, and the sound volume is restricted. It is canceled in a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) shorter than the required period of the game times. However, even if the sound volume restriction state is released, if sound cracking occurs again during the same game, the sound cracking is continued for a predetermined time, and then the sound volume restriction state is entered again. That is, the period during which the volume is limited and the period during which the volume is not limited are repeated during one game. In this case, a sound-breaking effect sound and a sound-breaking effect sound are alternately output, and the player can hear whether the sound-breaking effect is being performed or not. Differentiated, it is possible to diversify the effect form by sound. Moreover, when the sound is distorted, the waveforms (timbres) of the sounds output from the speakers 91 and 101 are different even if the sound data of the effect sound is the same, so that the player hears the effect sound of a different tone color. It will be.

  Here, the hold command handling process executed in step S1108 of the notification and effect control process (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Here, the hold command handling process corresponds to the hold command in the command handling process executed by the sound/light control device 72 when the command is transmitted from the main control device 71 to the sound/light control device 72. ..

  In the hold command handling process, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not a big hit handling command is received. Here, the sub MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72 receives a command from the main control device 71, and the received command is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the RWM 145. The command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can individually store a plurality of commands and can be read from the previously stored commands. Even if a plurality of commands are received at the same time, each of them is stored. The processing corresponding to the command can be executed well. At the time of determination in step S1201, it is determined whether or not a jackpot handling pending command has been received in the current read target area in the command storage area. Note that the command reading configuration is the same in the following command reading.

  When the jackpot handling pending command is received, in step S1202, information on the pending number included in the command received this time is identified, and the information on the identified pending number is stored in various counter areas of the RWM 145. Set to erase counter. The information on the number of reservations set in the erasing counter is updated so that it is decremented by 1 each time a new game is started, as described later.

  After setting the erasing counter in step S1202, the jackpot correspondence setting process is executed in steps S1203 to S1207.

  In the jackpot setting process, it is first determined in step S1203 whether or not the hold command received this time corresponds to any of the super reach A to C. In the present embodiment, a plurality of variable display modes of symbols are set so that the jackpot expectation level is different, and a configuration is adopted in which the jackpot expectation level in the game time is notified by each variable display mode. However, in step S1203, it is determined by referring to the variable display pattern storage area of the ROM 144 for direct whether or not the hold command corresponds to the super reach A to C.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1203, this setting process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if there is information corresponding to super reach A to C in the hold information, the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, the lottery table storing area of the lottery table storage area of the ROM 144 for direct is referred to, and in the subsequent step S1205, the lottery whether or not to execute the above-mentioned sound splitting effect is performed. Execute the process.

  Specifically, the value of the lottery counter for the sound cracking effect is read from the lottery counter of the RWM 145, and the lottery table (sound cracking effect lottery information group) for the sound cracking effect stored directly in the ROM 144 is referred to. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the read-out lottery counter corresponds to the winning result. The value of the lottery counter is configured to be updated (incremented by 1) every time the hold command handling process is started, that is, in a cycle of about 2 msec.

  After executing the process of step S1205, the process proceeds to step S1206, and it is determined whether or not a sound cracking effect has been won. When a negative determination is made in step S1206, this setting process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S1206, the operation proceeds to step S1207, and the sound break effect flag is set. The sound cracking effect flag is a flag that is set in various flag storage areas of the RWM 145, and when set, indicates that the sound cracking effect is performed when the jackpot handling hold command is received (jackpot reach). It is a thing.

  After performing the process of step S1207, the process proceeds to step S1208, and the jackpot is dealt with by the pending information storage area of the RWM 145 (specifically, the youngest area among the areas in which the pending information is not stored in the first to eighth areas). The hold information to be set (specifically, information regarding whether or not the sound cracking effect is allowed) is set, and this hold command handling process is ended.

  Here, a supplementary description will be given of the configuration related to the hold information storage area. The hold information storage area has the first area to the eighth area as described above, and one hold information can be stored in each area. The hold information stored in the first area to the eighth area is sequentially shifted to the lower area side by receiving the shift command from the main control device 71, that is, when the game time is started. .. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area... eighth area→seventh area, etc. The data in each area is shifted to. In the holding ball storage area of the main control device 71, the upper working opening holding area and the lower working opening holding area are provided separately, but in the holding information storing area of the sound/light control device 72, the holding information storing area is set. The hold information is configured to be stored collectively in a time series regardless of the ball tip.

  Returning to the description of step S1201 again, if it is determined in the same step S1201 that the big hit support pending command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S1209, it is determined whether or not the detach reach correspondence holding command has been received.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1209, that is, if it is determined that the detachment reach pending command has been received, in steps S1210 to S1214 the detach reach correspondence setting process is executed.

  In the out-reach correspondence setting process, first, in step S1210, it is determined whether or not the hold command received this time corresponds to any of the super-reach A to C. In the present embodiment, a plurality of variable display modes of symbols are set so that the jackpot expectation level is different, and a configuration is adopted in which the jackpot expectation level in the game time is notified by each variable display mode. However, in step S1210, it is determined by referring to the variable display pattern storage area of the ROM 144 for direct whether or not the hold command corresponds to the super reach A to C.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1210, this setting process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1210, that is, when there is information corresponding to super reach A to C in the hold information, the process proceeds to step S1211. In step S1211, the lottery processing table of the sound break effect corresponding to the deviation stored in the lottery table storage area of the ROM 144 for direct is referred to, and in the subsequent step S1212, the lottery processing of whether or not to execute the above-described sound cracking effect. To execute.

  Specifically, the value of the lottery counter for the sound cracking effect is read from the lottery counter of the RWM 145, and the lottery table for the sound cracking effect stored directly in the ROM 144 is referred to, and the value of the read lottery counter is read. It is determined whether the value corresponds to the winning result. The value of the lottery counter is configured to be updated (incremented by 1) every time the hold command handling process is started, that is, in a cycle of about 2 msec.

  After executing the process of step S1212, the process proceeds to step S1213, and it is determined whether or not a sound cracking effect has been won. When a negative determination is made in step S1213, this setting process is directly terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S1213, then the operation proceeds to step S1214, and the sound break effect flag is set. The sound cracking effect flag is a flag that is set in various flag storage areas of the RWM 145, and when set, it is possible to perform sound cracking effect when a detachment reach corresponding suspension command is received (detachment reach). It is shown.

  After the process of step S1214 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1208, and the RWM 145 is dealt with the deviation to the holding information storage area (specifically, the youngest area among the areas where the holding information is not stored in the first to eighth areas). The hold information to be set (specifically, information regarding whether or not the sound cracking effect is allowed) is set, and this hold command handling process is ended.

  In the hold command handling process described in detail above, it is determined whether or not to execute the sound splitting effect with reference to the hold command, and the result is stored in the hold information storage area.

  The sound and light control device 72 has a configuration in which, when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control device 71, the effect mode such as the mode of variable display is specified again. At this time, the hold information storage area is referenced to identify whether or not the sound cracking effect is to be performed by referring to the area corresponding to the variation start command. In other words, whether or not the sound cracking effect is possible is specified when the hold command is received before the fluctuation start command is received, and when the fluctuation start command is received, only the specified result is referred to. There is no lottery for sound cracking again.

<Operation in Sound Data Processing Unit 153 of Sound Output LSI 146>
Next, the operation of the sound data processing unit 153 of the sound output LSI 146 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The sound data processing unit 153 is provided as a dedicated circuit that operates independently of the sub MPU 142 and the data transfer unit 155, and creates digital musical sound data based on the sequence data and the parameter data transmitted from the sub MPU 142, By supplying the created digital musical sound data to the DAC 154, the notification sounds and the effect sounds are output from the speakers 91 and 101. Digital tone data includes data for outputting information sounds such as messages as guide sounds and alarm sounds (bell sounds, buzzer sounds, siren sounds, etc.) as fraudulent sounds, and melody without lyrics and lyrics. Data for outputting effect sounds such as melody, sound effects, and voice are included.

  The operation will be described in detail. First, it is determined whether or not the sequence data and parameter data to be processed are stored in the area for each parameter and the area for sequence data in the register 152 (step S1301). In this determination, for example, in the sequence data area and the parameter area, when the sequence data and the parameter data are newly set by the signal output from the sub MPU 142, “1” is set and the sound is output. An area is provided in which “0” is set when processed by the data processing unit 153, and the sound data processing unit 153 determines whether sequence data and parameter data to be processed exist based on the data in the area. Determine whether or not.

  If the sequence data to be processed and the parameter data exist (step S1301: YES), the parameter data for each sound channel provided in the register 152 is set according to the time data included in the sequence data to be processed. Of these areas, the data is written in the corresponding area defined by the sequence data (step S1302). By the way, the sound data processing unit 153 can access the area for each parameter and the area for sequence data.

  The sequence data and each parameter data set once are set as data capable of creating digital tone data for a plurality of consecutive samples for a plurality of sound generation channels. Then, according to the time data included in the sequence data, the corresponding parameter data for a plurality of samples is written in time series one sample at a time for each sounding channel area.

  Further, in the parameter data to be written here, the address of the sound data required at the corresponding sounding channel and the corresponding output timing is set. The data transfer unit 155 can access the area for each sound generation channel, reads the sound data of the address set in the parameter data of the latest sample from the common ROM 147, and writes it in the register 152.

  It should be noted that the plurality of samples may be all or a part of a series of sounds (for example, from the start to the end of a melody), but it is a part in order to suppress the amount of data transferred at one time. Is preferred. Further, in the sound data processing unit 153, even in the middle of outputting a series of sounds in accordance with the sequence data and the parameter data that have already been received, the sound data processing unit 153 stops based on the instruction from the sub MPU 142, and a new series of sounds is generated. The output may be started.

  The sound data processing unit 153 determines whether or not it is the timing to create digital musical sound data based on a signal input from a clock circuit (not shown) provided in the sound output LSI 146 (step S1303). The signal output cycle from this clock circuit corresponds to the sampling cycle.

  If it is the creation timing (step S1303: YES), digital tone data is generated for each sounding channel based on the parameter data of the corresponding sample and the sound data already transferred to the register 152 by the data transfer unit 155. Create (step S1304). Also, the digital musical tone data created for each of the sounding channels is synthesized to create digital synthesized musical tone data (step S1305). By the way, of the parameter data written in the areas for the respective sound generation channels, the one for which the digital tone data has been created is erased, and the parameter data for the latest sample is updated.

  In the sound data processing unit 153, the output timing of the digital synthetic musical sound data is based on the signal input from the clock circuit (not shown) provided in the sound output LSI 146, which outputs the signal at a timing different from that in step S1303. Or not (step S1306). The signal output cycle from this clock circuit corresponds to the sampling cycle. It should be noted that at the output timing of the digital synthetic tone data for outputting the notification sound, the digital tone data for outputting the effect sound is not output. As a result, when the notification sound is output from the speakers 91 and 101, the effect sound is not output.

  If it is the output timing (step S1306: YES), the created digital synthesized tone data corresponding to the current output is supplied to the DAC 154 (step S1307). The DAC 154 converts the digital synthesized tone data supplied from the tone data processing unit 153 into an analog signal and outputs it as an analog tone signal to the amplifier 171 (speakers 91, 101). As a result, a predetermined sound is output from the speakers 91 and 101. In addition, in some cases, a plurality of types of sounds may not be output at the same time. In this case, the digital synthesized tone data is not created, and a single digital tone data is supplied to the DAC 154, and the corresponding single tone is output to the speaker. It is output from 91 and 101.

  In the sound data processing unit 153, whether or not the sound data is transferred from the data transfer unit 155 to the register 152 as necessary, and whether or not the analog musical tone signal is output from the DAC 154 to the amplifier 171. It is determined whether or not sound is being output through such monitoring (step S1308). When the sound is being output (step S1308: YES), the sound outputting signal is output via the bus B1 connecting the sub MPU 142 and the sound output LSI 146. In this case, the signal path used in the bus B1 is the eighth signal path J8 used when accessing the selector area from the sub MPU 142, and the sub MPU 142 outputs the signal via the eighth signal path J8. The sound output signal is output at a non-timing timing.

<Volume setting process>
Next, the volume setting processing executed in step S1109 of the notification and effect control processing (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the volume setting process, in step S1401, it is determined whether the output sound from the speakers 91 and 101 is a notification sound. Here, it is determined whether or not the data table read from the direct ROM 144 corresponds to the notification system command. If the data table corresponds to the notification system command, the output sound is the notification sound. ..

  When the output sound is the notification sound, the process proceeds to step S1402, and it is determined whether the output sound is an unauthorized sound of the notification sounds. Here, it is determined whether or not the data table read from the direct ROM 144 is a fraudulent command among the notification commands. Examples of the fraud command include a magnet detection command, a fraudulent winning command, and a radio wave detection command. As the fraudulent sound, a magnet is brought close to the upper working opening 33 of the game board 24, a game ball is fraudulently won in the special winning opening of the variable winning device 32, the upper working opening 33 and the lower working. Examples thereof include an alarm sound and a voice message for notifying that the electric wave is being oscillated toward the mouth 34.

  If the output sound is an improperly generated sound, the process advances to step S1403 to set the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 to the maximum value (rated value) regardless of the position of the volume switch 111. The amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set so that the fraudulent sound output from each of the speakers 91 and 101 has the maximum volume. When the output sound is an illegally generated sound, the same sound signal is input to each of the speakers 91 and 101, whereby the illegally generated sound having the same content is output from all the speakers 91 and 101.

  If the output sound is not an improperly generated sound, it is determined that the output sound is a guidance sound, and the process advances to step S1404 to perform a guidance sound volume setting process. Here, when the output sound is not an illegally generated sound among the notification sounds, a case where the data table directly read from the ROM 144 is a payout abnormality command among the notification system commands is included, and the output sound is a guidance sound. There is. Here, as the payout abnormality command, there is a tank ball-less command and a lower plate full command, and as the guide sound, the tank 76 is in a ball-less state and the lower plate 62a is full of game balls. And a voice message for notifying that a predetermined abnormality has occurred in paying out the game balls.

  A detailed description of the guide sound volume setting process will be given later. When the output sound is the guide sound, the same sound signal is input to the speakers 91 and 101 as in the case where the output sound is the fraudulently generated sound, whereby the same content is output from all the speakers 91 and 101. A guidance sound is output.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1401, after the processing of step S1403 or the processing of step S1404, the process proceeds to step S1405. In step S1405, it is determined whether the output sounds from the speakers 91 and 101 are effect sounds. Here, it is determined whether or not the data table read from the direct ROM 144 corresponds to the effect system command, and if the data table corresponds to the effect system command, the output sound is the effect sound. ..

  When the output sound is the effect sound, the process proceeds to step S1406, and it is determined whether or not the current volume adjustment mode is set to the volume limit mode for performing the volume limit. Here, based on the detection signal of the volume switch 111, it is determined whether the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F, and when it is on the scale F, the volume limit mode is set.

  When the volume limit mode is not set, that is, when the position of the volume switch 111 is set to any one of the scales 0 to 5, the process proceeds to step S1407, and the volume switch 111 is operated based on the detection signal of the volume switch 111. The position is determined, and the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set to a value according to the position of the volume switch 111. As described above, when the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scales 0 to 5, the output volume from the speakers 91 and 101 is set to a level at which sound cracking does not easily occur. It is considered that the cause is limited to the noise of the sound signal. In this case, even if a sound crack occurs in the effect sound due to noise in the sound signal, it is assumed that the sound break will end in an instant, and the occurrence of the sound crack will cause the player to continue to feel uncomfortable. Hateful.

  When the volume limit mode is set, that is, when the position of the volume switch 111 is set to the scale F, the process proceeds to step S1408, and the effect sound volume setting process is performed. As described above, when the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set to the maximum value, a sound crack is likely to occur in the effect sound output from the speakers 91 and 101. Therefore, in the effect sound volume setting processing, the sound effect is distorted. The amplification factor of the amplifier 171 can be changed according to the occurrence. A detailed description of the effect sound volume setting processing will be given later. After the processing is executed in step S1407 or the processing is executed in step S1408, the volume setting processing is ended as it is.

<Instruction sound volume setting process>
Next, the volume setting process of the guide sound will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the present embodiment, the volume of the guide sound output from the speakers 91 and 101 is set uniformly (collectively) for all the speakers 91 and 101.

  In the volume setting process of the guide sound, it is determined in step S1501 whether or not the volume of the speakers 91 and 101 is limited. Here, it is determined whether or not the guide sound restriction flag is set, and when the guide sound restriction flag is set, it is determined that the volume is limited. The guide sound limitation flag is a flag that is set in various flag storage areas of the RWM 145, and when set, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 (power unit 173) is limited (volume is limited). Is shown.

  When the guide sound restriction flag is set, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set to a value smaller than the maximum value for all speakers 91 and 101, as described later. That is, the output volume from all the speakers 91 and 101 is limited.

  If the volume of the speakers 91 and 101 is not limited, the process advances to step S1502 to set the amplification factor of the amplifier 171. In this process, in order to output the guide sound at the maximum volume from the speakers 91 and 101, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set to the maximum value (the same value as the amplification factor in the case of the scale F) regardless of the position of the volume switch 111. Set. In this case, as described above, the sound cracks are likely to occur in the guide sound output from the speakers 91 and 101. On the other hand, when the volume is limited, it is assumed that the amplification factors of the amplifier 171 have already been set for all the speakers 91 and 101, and the process does not proceed to step S1502. That is, the process of setting the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 to the maximum value is not performed.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S1501 or after the processing of step S1502 has been executed, the operation proceeds to step S1503. In step S1503, it is determined whether or not the sound-breaking signal is received from the sound-breaking detection circuit 175. Here, it is determined whether or not a sound cracking signal is received from each of the sound cracking detection circuits 175, and if a sound cracking signal is received from at least one sound cracking detection circuit 175, a sound cracking signal is output. Suppose you are receiving. That is, it is assumed that the sound breaking signal is not received only when the sound breaking signal is not received from all the sound breaking detection circuits 175.

  When the sound cracking signal is received from the sound cracking detection circuit 175, the process proceeds to step S1504, and it is determined whether the sound cracking continuation timer counter Ta is set. The sound break continuation timer counter Ta is a timer counter set in various counter storage areas of the RWM 145, and is for measuring the duration of sound breaks occurring in at least one of the speakers 91 and 101. ..

  If the sound break continuation timer counter Ta has not been set, the process advances to step S1505, and the sound break continuous timer counter Ta is set to zero. By setting the sound break continuation timer counter Ta, the measurement of the continuous period of the sound break occurring at the current amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is started. If the sound break continuation timer counter Ta has already been set, the process does not proceed to step S1505 and the process of setting the sound break continuation timer counter Ta to zero is not performed.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S1504, or after the processing of step S1505 has been executed, the operation proceeds to step S1506, and the sound break continuation timer counter Ta is incremented by 1 (Ta=Ta+1). That is, the duration of sound break is measured by the sound break continuation timer counter Ta.

  In step S1507, it is determined whether or not any of the speakers 91 and 101 is in the sound crack continuation state by determining whether or not the sound crack continuation period exceeds a predetermined sound crack continuation determination period (for example, 100 msec). To judge. Here, a predetermined value Na (for example, 50) corresponding to the sound break continuation determination period is set in advance, and it is determined whether the sound break continuation timer counter Ta is larger than the predetermined value Na (Ta>Na). When Ta>Na, it is assumed that the sound crack continuation period exceeds the sound crack continuation determination period. That is, it is assumed that the sound cracking is in a continuous state.

  If any of the speakers 91, 101 is in the sound break-up continuous state, the process advances to step S1508, and the volume limiting process is performed for all the speakers 91, 101. In this process, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is changed to a value smaller than the current amplification factor by a predetermined rate (for example, 5%). Here, the reduction range of the amplification rate is smaller than the reduction range of the amplification rate when the position of the volume switch 111 is reduced by one step. When the volume level of the sound signal input to the speakers 91 and 101 becomes equal to or lower than the reference level of the speakers 91 and 101 by performing the volume limiting process, the sound is generated by either of the speakers 91 and 101. The cracked sound that was being played will be eliminated.

  However, there may be speakers 91 and 101 in which the volume level of the input sound signal is not lower than the reference level even if this volume limiting process is performed. In this case, the volume level becomes lower than the reference level. In the speakers 91 and 101 which are not provided, the sound breakage cannot be eliminated. On the other hand, since the guide sound volume setting process (step S1404 in FIG. 31) is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle, all the speakers 91 are set after changing the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 to a value smaller by the predetermined factor. , 101, the sound crack determination is performed again. Then, even if the amplification factor is reduced, if any of the speakers 91 and 101 is in the sound cracking continuation state, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is changed to a value smaller by a predetermined factor. That is, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is gradually reduced. As a result, it is possible to reliably eliminate the occurrence of sound cracks in the speakers 91 and 101 while avoiding the volume of the speakers 91 and 101 being excessively reduced.

  In step S1509, it is determined whether or not the guide sound restriction flag is set. If the guide sound limit flag is not set, it means that the guide sound limit flag is not set even though the guide sound volume is limited. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S1510, and the guide sound limit flag is set. .. Setting the guide sound limitation flag corresponds to storing that the volume limitation is being performed on the speakers 91 and 101 that have been in the sound break continuous state.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S1509, or after the processing of step S1510 has been executed, the operation proceeds to step S1511. In step S1511, the sound break continuation timer counter Ta is cleared. By this processing, at the current amplification factor of the amplifier 171, the measurement of the duration of the occurrence of sound cracking is completed. In addition, this processing is to measure the duration of sound crack generation from zero again when one of the speakers 91 and 101 is in the sound crack continuation state again even though the sound volume is limited. It is also a process of resetting the sound break continuation timer counter Ta.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1503, a negative determination is made in step S1507, or after the processing of step S1511 is performed, the flow proceeds to step S1512, and the sound volume limit restriction cancellation processing for canceling the volume restriction is performed. I do. After executing the processing of step S1512, the guide sound volume setting processing is ended as it is.

  The guide sound volume limit cancellation processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the guide sound volume limit canceling process, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not to end the output of the guide sound from the speakers 91 and 101. Here, it is determined whether or not the payout abnormality cancellation command is received from the main control device 71, and when the payout abnormality cancellation command is received, it is determined that the output of the guide sound is ended. When it is determined that the output of the guide sound is to be ended, the process proceeds to step S1602, and it is determined whether the volume of the speakers 91 and 101 is limited. Here, it is assumed that it is determined whether or not the guide sound restriction flag is set, and if the guide sound restriction flag is set, the volume of the speakers 91 and 101 is limited.

  If a positive determination is made in both steps S1601 and S1602, the flow advances to step S1603 to cancel the volume limit. Here, the position of the volume switch 111 is determined based on the detection signal of the volume switch 111, and the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set to a value according to the position of the volume switch 111. In step S1604, the guidance sound restriction flag is cleared. By performing this processing, the data that the volume limit has been performed will be reset.

  When a negative determination is made in one of steps S1602 and S1602, the volume limitation canceling process of the main guide sound is ended.

<Sound effect volume setting processing>
Next, the sound effect volume setting processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 34. In the present embodiment, when the output sound from the speakers 91 and 101 is the effect sound, the volume of the effect sound output from the speakers 91 and 101 is different from that when the output sound is the guide sound. , 101 are set individually.

  In the volume setting process of the effect sound, it is determined in step S1701 whether or not there are speakers 91 and 101 whose volume is not limited. Here, it is determined whether or not the effect sound limit counter S is set for each of the speakers 91 and 101, and if there is the speaker 91 or 101 for which the effect sound limit counter S is not set, the volume is limited. It is assumed that there are no speakers 91 and 101. The effect sound limit counter S is a flag that is set in various flag storage areas of the RWM 145 corresponding to the speakers 91 and 101 whose volume is limited, and when set, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is limited. It indicates that there is. In the various flag storage areas, it is possible to individually set the effect sound limit counter S corresponding to each of the speakers 91 and 101.

  If the effect sound limit counter S is set, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set to a value smaller than the maximum value for the speakers 91 and 101 to which the effect sound limit counter S corresponds, as described later. Will be there. That is, the effect sound limit counter S limits the output volume from the corresponding speakers 91, 101.

  If there are speakers 91 and 101 whose volume is not limited, the process proceeds to step S1702, and the process of setting the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is performed. In this process, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set to the maximum value in accordance with the position of the volume switch 111 being on the scale F for the speakers 91 and 101 whose volume is not limited. It should be noted that the amplification factors of the amplifiers 171 have already been set for the speakers 91 and 101 whose volume is limited (the effect sound limit counter S is set), so that the amplification factors are set in step S1702. do not do.

  On the other hand, when there is no speaker 91 or 101 whose volume is not limited (when the volume of all speakers 91 and 101 is limited), it is assumed that the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 has already been set for all the speakers 91 and 101. , And does not proceed to step S1702. That is, the process of setting the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 to the maximum value is not performed.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1701 or after the processing of step S1702 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1703. In step S1703, it is determined whether or not the sound cracking signal is received from the sound cracking detection circuit 175. Here, it is determined whether or not a sound cracking signal is received from each of the sound cracking detection circuits 175, and if a sound cracking signal is received from at least one sound cracking detection circuit 175, a sound cracking signal is output. Suppose you are receiving. That is, it is assumed that the sound breaking signal is not received only when the sound breaking signal is not received from all the sound breaking detection circuits 175.

  In addition, when the variable display is performed at each game time or in the opening/closing execution mode, sound effects and messages in addition to the melody are collected from the speakers 91 and 101 as compared with the case of the normal game state. The frequency of output is increased, and the melody, sound effect, and message are overlapped, so that the output volume easily exceeds the reference level. That is, sound breakage is likely to occur. Therefore, in the output sound, the portion that is output according to the game times and the opening/closing execution mode is likely to be the loud volume portion, and the portion that is output according to the normal gaming state has a lower volume than the loud volume portion. It tends to be the volume part.

  When the sound cracking signal is received from the sound cracking detection circuit 175, the process proceeds to step S1704, and one of the speakers 91 and 101 is specified as the sound cracking speaker. Here, it is determined which of the plurality of sound breakage detection circuits 175 is the output source of the sound breakup signal, and the speaker 91, 101 corresponding to the sound breakage detection circuit 175 which is the output source is caused to generate the sound breakup. It is identified as a speaker with sound cracking that is likely to occur.

  In step S1705, it is determined whether or not the sound breaking continuation timer counter Tb is set for the sound breaking speaker identified in immediately preceding step S1704. The sound-breaking continuation timer counter Tb is a timer counter that is set in various counter storage areas of the RWM 145 corresponding to the sound-breaking speaker, and is for measuring the duration of the sound-breaking sound occurring in the sound-breaking speaker. Is. In the various counter storage areas, it is possible to individually set the sound break continuation timer counter Tb corresponding to each of the speakers 91 and 101.

  If the sound-breaking continuation timer counter Tb is not set for the sound-breaking speaker identified in the immediately preceding step S1704, the process advances to step S1706, and the sound-breaking continuation timer counter is performed for the sound breaking speaker identified in the immediately preceding step S1704. Tb is set to zero in each counter storage area of the RWM 145. By setting the sound break continuation timer counter Tb, the measurement of the continuous period of the sound break occurring at the current amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is started. If the sound break continuation timer counter Tb is already set for the sound break speaker identified in step S1704, the process does not proceed to step S1705, and the process of setting the sound break continuation timer counter Tb to zero is not performed.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S1705, or after the processing of step S1706 has been executed, processing advances to step S1707, in which the sound break continuation timer counter Tb for the sound break speaker is incremented by 1 (Tb=Tb+1). That is, the duration of sound breakup in the sound breaker speaker is measured by the sound break continuation timer counter Tb. Here, when a plurality of effect sound limit timer counters are set, all effect sound limit timer counters are incremented by one. Accordingly, when there are a plurality of sound cracking speakers, the sound break duration period is individually measured for all sound breaking speakers.

  In step S1708, the sound cracking speaker is in the sound cracking continuation state by determining whether or not the sound cracking duration has continued beyond a predetermined sound crack continuation determination period (for example, 100 msec). It is determined whether or not. Here, a predetermined value Nb (for example, 50) corresponding to the sound break continuation determination period is set in advance, and it is determined whether the sound break continuation timer counter Tb is larger than the predetermined value Nb (Tb>Nb), When Tb>Nb, it is assumed that the sound crack continuation period exceeds the sound crack continuation determination period. That is, it is assumed that the sound breaking speaker is in the sound breaking continuing state.

  When there are a plurality of sound cracking speakers, it is determined whether or not Tb>Nb is satisfied for each of the sound cracking continuation timer counters Tb set corresponding to each sound cracking speaker, and when Tb>Nb. If at least one sound cracking speaker is determined to be present, it is determined that there is at least one sound cracking speaker in the sound cracking continuous state, and the affirmative determination is made in step S1708.

  If there is a sound breaking speaker in the sound breaking continuing state, the process advances to step S1709 to determine whether or not to perform the sound breaking effect. Here, it is determined whether or not the sound-breaking effect flag is set, and when the sound-breaking effect flag is set, the sound-breaking effect is performed. As described above, the sound cracking effect flag is set in steps S1207 and S1214 of the pending command handling process (FIG. 29), and when set, indicates that the sound cracking effect is won. ..

  When the sound cracking effect is not performed, the process proceeds to step S1710, and the sound volume limiting process is performed on the sound cracking speaker in the sound cracking continuous state. In this process, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set to a predetermined ratio (for example, 5%) higher than the current amplification factor, with the sound amplification speaker of the current amplification factor of the amplifier 171 being in the state of sound distortion continuation as a target of the sound emission reduction. Just change it to a smaller value. Here, the reduction range of the amplification rate is smaller than the reduction range of the amplification rate when the position of the volume switch 111 is reduced by one step. With respect to the speaker whose sound crack is to be eliminated, the sound crack is eliminated when the volume level of the input sound signal becomes equal to or lower than the reference level due to the volume limitation process.

  However, with respect to the speaker for which sound cracking is to be eliminated, the sound level of the input sound signal may not fall below the reference level even if the sound volume limiting processing is performed, and in this case, sound cracking is not eliminated. However, since the volume setting process of the guide sound is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle, after changing and setting the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 to a value smaller by the predetermined ratio, the determination regarding the sound crack is made for all the speakers 91 and 101. Is done again. Then, even in the case of the speaker whose sound cracking is to be eliminated, if sound cracking occurs and the sound cracking continues, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is changed to a value smaller by a predetermined factor. That is, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is gradually reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the volume of the speakers 91 and 101 from becoming excessively low, and it is possible to reliably eliminate the occurrence of sound cracks in the speakers 91 and 101.

  In step S1711, it is determined whether or not the effect sound limitation counter S is set for the speaker whose volume is limited in the immediately preceding step S1710. If there is a speaker for which the sound effect limit counter S is not set even though the sound volume has been limited in the immediately preceding step S1710, the process proceeds to step S1712, and the effect sound is generated for the speaker whose sound volume is limited in the immediately preceding step S1710. The limit counter S is set. Setting the effect sound limitation counter S is equivalent to storing that the volume limitation is applied to the sound cracking speaker that has been in the sound cracking continuous state. Even for the speaker whose sound cracking is to be eliminated, the effect sound limit counter S is already set for the speaker for which the effect sound limit counter S is already set (the volume is limited before the immediately preceding step S1710). Is not set.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S1711, or after the processing of step S1712 has been executed, the operation proceeds to step S1713. In step S1713, the effect sound limit counter S is incremented by 1 (S=S+1) for the speaker whose volume is limited in step S1710 immediately before. In other words, the effect sound limit counter S counts the number of times the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is reduced by a predetermined value (the number of levels of the sound volume limit that is repeatedly executed) for the speaker whose volume is restricted. If there is a plurality of speakers whose volume is limited in the previous step S1710, the effect sound limit counter S is incremented by 1 in order to count the number of steps of the volume limit executed repeatedly for all the speakers.

  In step S1714, the sound break continuation timer counter Tb is cleared for the speaker whose volume is limited in step S1710 immediately before. Through this process, the measurement of the duration of the sound crack occurrence ends for the speakers 91 and 101 whose volume is limited at the current amplification factor of the amplifier 171. This process is performed by the sound break continuation timer counter in order to newly measure the duration of sound break occurrence from zero when the sound break occurs again for the speaker whose sound volume is restricted It is also a process of resetting Tb.

  After performing the process of step S1714, in step S1715, a volume harmonization process for balancing the volume of the sound cracking speaker and the volume of the non-sound cracking speaker with no sound cracking is performed. In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S1703, a negative determination is made in step S1708, or after the processing of step S1715 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1716, and the sound volume limit of the effect sound for canceling the volume limit is performed. Cancel processing is performed. A detailed description of this volume limit release processing will be given later.

  On the other hand, if a sound cracking effect is to be produced (YES in step S1709), the flow advances to step S1717 to determine whether the effect sound limit counter S is set. If the effect sound limit counter S is not set, there is a sound cracking speaker that is in a sound cracking continuous state, but it is determined that the sound volume cracking speaker has not been performed yet, and the process proceeds to step S1718.

  In step S1718, it is determined whether or not it is time to start volume limitation in the sound split effect. Here, the elapsed time after the sound cracking speaker is in the sound cracking continuous state is measured, and it is determined whether the elapsed time exceeds the performance sound cracking period. When it exceeds, it is time to start the volume limitation. The production sound cracking period is set to a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) regardless of which of the super reach A to C the hold command received from the main control device 71 corresponds to.

  The production sound cracking period may be set according to the reach mode to which the hold command corresponds. For example, the effect sound cracking period may be set to be shorter as the expectation of winning of the reach mode corresponding to the hold command is higher. Specifically, the production sound cracking period is set to the shortest period (for example, 1 second) when the hold command corresponds to the super reach C having the highest expectation of winning, and the super reach A having the lowest expectation of winning is set. In the case of corresponding to, the longest period (for example, 3 seconds) may be set. In this case, when it corresponds to super reach B, it is preferable to set the length (for example, 2 seconds) between the periods corresponding to super reach A and super reach C.

  If it is not the volume limit start timing, the process directly proceeds to step S1716, and the main volume setting process is repeatedly executed until the volume limit start timing. If it is not the volume limit start timing, the configuration may be such that it waits in step S1718 until the volume limit start timing. In this case, it is preferable that the main volume setting process is not executed during the standby period in S1718.

  If an affirmative judgment is made in step S1717 or if an affirmative judgment is made in step S1718, the processes of steps S1710 to S1715 are executed in the same manner as in the case of making a negative judgment in step S1709. That is, after the volume limitation start timing, the volume limitation is performed on the speaker whose sound cracking is to be eliminated.

<Volume harmony processing>
When a speaker for which sound cracking is to be eliminated and a speaker for which sound cracking is not to be eliminated are mixed in each of the speakers 91 and 101, if volume restriction is performed only on the speaker for which sound cracking is to be eliminated, the speaker and the sound for which sound cracking is eliminated. There is a concern that the difference in the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 (difference in the output volume) becomes excessively large between the speakers that are not the crack elimination target, and the balance of the output volume between the speakers may be lost. On the other hand, if the volume of the speaker that is not the target of sound crack elimination is limited in the same manner as that of the speaker that is subject to sound crack elimination, the output volume from all the speakers 91 and 101 is simply reduced, and the effect of the output sound is obtained. Is a concern that it will decrease.

  Therefore, when the number of stages of the volume limit for the speaker for which sound cracking is eliminated reaches a predetermined number, the sound volume is balanced for the purpose of balancing the output volume of the speaker for which sound cracking is eliminated and the speaker for which sound cracking is not eliminated. The volume harmonization process is performed to limit the volume of the speaker that is not the target of crack resolution. In the volume setting process, for example, every time the number of stages of volume limitation for the speaker whose sound crack is eliminated reaches two or four, the volume limitation is performed only for the speaker which is not subject for sound crack elimination. ing.

  Here, the volume harmony process executed in step S1714 of the effect sound volume setting process (FIG. 34) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the volume harmony processing, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not there is a speaker that is not the target of sound breakup elimination. Here, it is determined whether or not the effect sound limit counter S is set for each of the speakers 91 and 101, and if there is even one speaker for which the effect sound limit counter S is not set, the sound breakup elimination target is set. Suppose you have a speaker that is not. Here, the effect sound limitation counter S counts the number of steps of the volume limitation executed repeatedly with respect to the speaker whose volume is limited, as already described in the description of step S1713. If the effect sound limit counter S is 1, the sound volume limit is performed only one step, and if the effect sound limit counter S is 4, the sound volume limit is performed in four steps.

  If there is a speaker that is not a sound crack elimination target, the process proceeds to step S1802. If there is no speaker that is not a sound crack elimination subject, that is, if all the speakers 91 and 101 are sound crack elimination targets, the volume harmony processing is performed as it is. To finish.

  In step S1802, it is determined whether or not the effect sound limit counter S is M times 4 (M is a natural number) (S=4×M). That is, it is determined whether or not the volume limitation being performed has reached a multiple of 4 such as 4, 8, and 12. Here, it is determined by substituting 4 for the first determination value whether or not the number of stages of volume limitation performed for the speaker whose sound cracking is to be eliminated is M times the first determination value. Yes, a positive determination is made when the number of steps of volume limitation is any of multiples of 4, (4, 8, 12,... ).

  When the effect sound limit counter S is M times 4 (when the volume limit reaches a stage of a multiple of 4), the process proceeds to step S1803, and the volume limit process is performed on the speaker that is not the target of sound crack elimination. This limits the volume by one level. Here, a speaker that is not in the sound distortion continuation state at the current amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set as a speaker that is not a sound distortion cancellation target, and the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set to a predetermined ratio (a sound distortion cancellation target Change the value to a smaller value). When there are a plurality of speakers that are not the target of sound distortion elimination, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is lowered by one step for all the speakers that are not the target of sound distortion elimination.

  When such processing is performed, as the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 for the speaker whose sound distortion is to be eliminated is lowered by four levels (the number of stages of the first determination value), the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is reduced for the speaker that is not the object of sound distortion elimination. It will be one step lower. That is, the amplification factor of the sound-breaking speaker and the amplification factor of the non-sound-breaking speaker are reduced at a ratio of 4:1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the output volume of the speaker whose sound crack is to be eliminated from becoming extremely small as compared with the output volume of the speaker which is not the sound crack to be eliminated, thereby maintaining the balance of the output volumes.

  When the effect sound limit counter S is not M times 4 (when the volume limit has not reached the stage of a multiple of 4), the process proceeds to step S1804, and the effect sound limit counter S is M times 2 (M is It is determined whether it is a natural number) (S=2×M). In other words, it is determined whether or not the volume limitation being executed has reached a stage of a multiple of 2 excluding a multiple of 4 such as 2, 6, and 10. Here, it is determined whether the number of stages of the volume limitation performed for the speaker whose sound cracking is to be eliminated is M times the second determination value that is smaller than the first determination value. Is performed by substituting, and an affirmative determination is made when the number of steps of volume limitation is any of multiples of 2 (2, 6, 10...) Excluding multiples of 4.

  When the effect sound limit counter S is M times 2 (when the volume limit reaches the stage of a multiple of 2 excluding the multiple of 4), the process proceeds to step S1805, and the lower speaker 101 is a target for sound crack elimination. It is determined whether or not. Here, it is determined whether or not each of the pair of lower-side speakers 101 is a target for sound crack elimination, and when at least one of the pair of lower-side speakers 101 is a target for sound crack elimination, a lower side is determined. It is assumed that the speaker 101 is the target for eliminating the sound crack.

  If the lower speaker 101 is the target for sound crack elimination, the process advances to step S1806, and the volume limitation processing is performed on the speaker that is not the subject for sound crack elimination to limit the volume by one step. Here, similar to step S1802, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is smaller than the current amplification factor by a predetermined ratio (the same as the lowering range of the speaker of which the sound distortion is to be eliminated) for all the speakers which are not the target of sound distortion elimination. Change to. When there are a plurality of speakers that are not the target of sound crack elimination, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is lowered by one step for all the speakers that are not the target of sound crack elimination.

  When such processing is performed, as the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 for the speaker whose sound distortion is to be eliminated is lowered by two steps (the number of steps of the second determination value), the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is reduced for the speaker that is not the object of sound distortion elimination. It will be one step lower. That is, the amplification factor of the sound-breaking speaker and the amplification factor of the non-sound-breaking speaker are reduced at a ratio of 2:1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the output volume of the speaker whose sound crack is to be eliminated from becoming extremely small as compared with the output volume of the speaker which is not the sound crack to be eliminated, thereby maintaining the balance of the output volumes.

  If both of the pair of lower speakers 101 are not the target of sound crack elimination, that is, if one of the pair of upper speakers 91 is the target of sound crack elimination, the process proceeds to step S1807, and the pair of upper speakers is paired. The volume limitation processing is performed on the speaker that is not the target of sound crack elimination in 91, and the volume limitation is performed only by one step. Here, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 of the upper speaker 91 that is not the target of sound distortion elimination is changed to a value that is smaller than the current amplification factor by a predetermined rate (the same as the reduction range of the speaker of which sound distortion elimination is targeted).

  When such processing is performed, as the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 of the speaker whose sound distortion is to be eliminated is lowered by two steps (the number of steps of the second determination value), the speaker of the upper speaker 91 which is not the object of sound distortion elimination is amplified. The amplification factor of 171 is lowered by one step. As a result, it is possible to prevent the output volume of the speaker, which is the target of sound crack elimination, of the pair of upper speakers 91 from becoming extremely lower than the output volume of the speaker that is not the target of sound crack elimination, thereby reducing the output volume of those speakers. You can keep balance. On the other hand, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is not reduced but is maintained at the current amplification factor even if the pair of lower speakers 101 is not the target of sound crack elimination. As a result, in the configuration in which the upper speaker 91 outputs the middle and high tones and the lower speaker 101 outputs the low tone, the output volume of the lower speaker 101 becomes too low for volume harmony, and the low tone becomes difficult to hear. Can be suppressed.

  When the effect sound limit counter S is neither M times nor 2 M times 4 (when the sound volume restriction reaches an odd number of stages), it is determined that the sound volume restriction processing is not performed for the speaker that is not the target of sound crack elimination, and the sound volume restriction counter S This volume harmony processing is ended. In this way, even if the volume restriction for the speaker whose sound cracking is to be eliminated is carried out in one step, by ensuring the stage in which the volume restriction is not enforced for the speaker which is not the sound cracking elimination target, It is possible to add a difference in the number of steps of volume limitation with the speaker that is not the target of resolution elimination.

  After executing step S1803, after executing step S1806, or after executing step S1807, the process proceeds to step S1808. In step S1808, with respect to the speaker whose sound cracking is to be eliminated in any of the immediately preceding steps S1803, S1806, and S1807, the volume is limited even though it is not a sound cracking elimination target. , Set the volume harmony flag. The volume harmony flag is a flag that is set in various flag storage areas of the RWM 145, and when set, indicates that the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is limited even though it is not the target of sound crack elimination. Is.

  Here, a change mode of the volume level of the sound signal input to each of the speaker whose sound is to be resolved and the speaker which is not the target to be resolved when the volume harmony processing is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 36. To do. FIG. 36 is a time chart exemplifying a change mode of the actual volume level of the sound signal input to each of the speakers 91 and 101. In FIG. 36A, one of the pair of lower speakers 101 eliminates sound cracking. The time chart in the case of being targeted is shown, and the time chart in the case where one of the pair of upper speakers 91 is targeted for eliminating sound cracking is shown in (b). Note that in FIG. 36, the vertical axis represents the volume level, and the hold value of the volume level of the sound signal is illustrated as the actual volume level. Here, the vibration of the actual volume level is omitted and the fluctuation of the actual volume level is simplified and illustrated.

  In FIG. 36A, the actual volume level of the lower left speaker 101 of the pair of lower speakers 101 is higher than the allowable input level (reference level), and sound cracking occurs. On the other hand, at the timing T1, the amplification rate is decreased by one step with the left lower speaker 101 as the target for eliminating the sound distortion, and the actual volume level is decreased by one step. Regarding the lower speaker 101 on the left side, even if the actual volume level is lowered by one step, the sound cracking is not eliminated, and the amplification factor is further lowered stepwise, so that the total volume is finally lowered by four steps, and finally the actual volume level is allowed. Below the input level, the cracking of the sound has been eliminated.

  Regarding the other speakers 91 and 101 (a pair of upper speaker 91 and the lower speaker 101 on the right) other than the lower left speaker 101 out of all the speakers 91 and 101, the actual volume level is allowed at the timing T1. It is below the input level, and no cracking has occurred. Here, if the amplification factors of the other speakers 91 and 101 with no sound cracking are reduced by the same number of steps as the left lower speaker 101 with sound cracking, the output volumes from all the speakers 91 and 101 are reduced. The effect may be reduced, and the effect of the effect sound may be reduced. On the other hand, unless the amplification factor of the other speakers 91 and 101 that do not have sound cracking is reduced, sound cracking in the left lower speaker 101 can be eliminated, but the left lower speaker 101 (sound breaking speaker). And the other speakers 91 and 101 (non-sound-breaking speakers) have too large a difference in actual volume level, and the output volume balance between the lower speaker 101 and the other speakers 91 and 101 is lost.

  On the other hand, with respect to all the other speakers 91 and 101, at the timing T2 when the actual volume level of the left lower speaker 101 in which the sound is distorted is lowered by two steps and the timing T3 when it is lowered by four steps, The actual volume level is lowered by one step each. As a result, the difference in actual volume level between the lower left speaker 101 and the other speakers 91, 101 is prevented from becoming too large. In this case, even if the volume of one of the pair of lower speakers 101 is reduced in order to eliminate the sound distortion, it is possible to balance the volume of the left and right lower speakers 101. The volume of the lower speaker 101 can be balanced. Therefore, with respect to all the speakers 91 and 101, it is possible to balance the sound volume between the speaker in which the sound crack occurs and the speaker in which the sound crack does not occur.

  By the way, the actual volume level of the left lower speaker 101 and the actual volume levels of the other speakers 91, 101 are lowered at a ratio of 2:1.

  In FIG. 36(b), the actual volume level of the right upper speaker 91 of the pair of upper speakers 91 is higher than the allowable input level, and sound cracking occurs. On the other hand, at the timing T4, the actual sound amplification level is decreased by one step by setting the right upper speaker 91 as a sound crack elimination target, and the actual volume level is decreased by one step. Regarding the right upper speaker 91, sound cracking is not eliminated even if the actual volume level is lowered by one step, and the actual volume level is gradually reduced by a total of five levels, and finally the actual volume level is allowed. It is below the input level and the sound crack is eliminated.

  Regarding the other speakers 91 and 101 except the right upper speaker 91 among all the speakers 91 and 101, the actual volume level is below the allowable input level at the timing T4, and no sound crack occurs.

  On the other hand, regarding the left upper speaker 91 in which the sound is not cracked among the pair of upper speakers 91, the timing T5 at which the actual volume level of the right upper speaker 91 in which the sound is cracked is lowered by two stages and 4 At the timing T6 when the step is lowered, the actual volume level is lowered by one step each. This prevents the difference in the actual volume level between the right upper speaker 91 (sound-breaking speaker) and the left upper speaker 91 (non-sound-breaking speaker) from becoming too large for the pair of upper speakers 91. There is. In this case, even if the volume of one of the pair of upper speakers 91 is reduced in order to eliminate sound distortion, the volume of the left and right upper speakers 91 can be balanced.

  Regarding the pair of lower speakers 101 with no sound crack, the actual sound volume level is decreased by one step at timing T5 when the actual sound volume level of the right upper speaker 91 with sound distortion is decreased by four steps. However, at the timing T4 when the actual volume level of the right upper speaker 91 is reduced by four steps, the actual volume level is not reduced. In this case, regarding the pair of upper speakers 91, the actual volume level of the right upper speaker 91 and the actual volume level of the left upper speaker 91 are lowered at a ratio of 2:1, while the actual volume level of the right upper speaker 91 is reduced. The actual volume level and the actual volume level of each lower speaker 101 are lowered at a ratio of 4:1. That is, compared to the actual volume levels of the right upper speaker 91 and the left upper speaker 91 arranged side by side with the sound-breaking, the actual volume levels of the right upper speaker 91 and the lower speaker 101 arranged vertically are compared. The amount of reduction is small. As a result, the output sound of the pair of lower speakers 101 can be kept at a volume as high as possible.

Here, in the configuration in which the upper speaker 91 outputs mid-high sounds and the lower speaker 101 outputs bass, even if the upper speaker 91 and the lower speaker 101 have the same actual volume level, the lower speaker 101 It is considered that the low-pitched sound output from the upper speaker 91 is less noticeable than the mid-to-high sound output from the upper speaker 91. Therefore, when the sound is not broken in both of the pair of lower speakers 101, the reduction amount of the actual volume level of each lower speaker 101 is made smaller than the reduction amount of the actual volume level of upper speaker 91. However, it is unlikely that the low-pitched sound output from the lower speaker 101 is more prominent than the mid-to-high pitch output from the upper speaker 91. Therefore, by keeping the output sound from the pair of lower speakers 101 at a volume that is as high as possible, it is possible to prevent the output volume of all the speakers 91 and 101 from being lowered and the effect of the presentation being reduced.
<Releasing volume limit of guide sound>
Next, the effect sound volume limit release processing executed in step S1715 of the effect sound volume setting processing (FIG. 34) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the effect sound volume limit release processing, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not there is a speaker whose sound cracking is to be eliminated. Here, it is determined whether or not the effect sound limit counter S is set for each of the speakers 91 and 101, and when the effect sound limit counter S is set, it is determined that there is a speaker whose sound cracking is to be eliminated. To do.

  If there is a speaker whose sound cracking is to be eliminated, the process proceeds to step S1902, and it is determined whether a sound cracking effect is to be performed. Here, it is determined whether or not the sound-breaking effect flag is set, and when the sound-breaking effect flag is set, the sound-breaking effect is performed. As described above, the sound cracking effect flag is set in steps S1207 and S1214 of the hold command handling process (FIG. 29), and is a flag indicating that the sound cracking effect is won by being set.

  In the case of performing the sound breaking effect, the process proceeds to step S1903, and it is determined whether or not it is time to end the sound breaking effect. Here, the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 is measured, and whether the elapsed period exceeds the variable display time of the symbols corresponding to each of the super reach A to C. Is determined, and when the elapsed period exceeds the variable display time of the symbol, it is the end timing of the sound cracking effect. That is, the timing at which each game time is ended is the timing at which the sound cracking effect is ended.

  If it is not the end timing of the sound breaking effect, the process proceeds to step S1904, and it is determined whether it is the timing to release the volume limitation. Here, the elapsed period from the start of volume limitation for the speaker whose sound cracking is to be eliminated is measured, and it is determined whether or not the elapsed period has exceeded the production limitation period. When it exceeds, it is time to execute the volume limit release. In this case, the production time limit period is set to the same period (for example, 2 seconds) as the production sound breaking period regardless of which of the super reach A to C the hold command received from the main control device 71 corresponds to. Has been done. In addition, the total of the production restriction period and the production sound cracking period is set to be smaller than 1/2 of the variable display period of the symbol, whereby the occurrence and elimination of sound cracks are repeated in the variable display period. It will be done multiple times.

  In addition, the production time limit period may be set to a period different from the production sound breaking period. Further, the production time limit may be set according to the reach mode to which the hold command corresponds. For example, the effect sound cracking period may be set to be shorter as the expectation of winning of the reach mode corresponding to the hold command is higher. Specifically, the production time limit is set to the shortest period (for example, 1 second) when the hold command corresponds to the super reach C having the highest expectation of winning, and the super reach A having the lowest expectation of winning is set. If it corresponds, the longest period (for example, 3 seconds) may be set. In this case, when it corresponds to super reach B, it is preferable to set the length (for example, 2 seconds) between the periods corresponding to super reach A and super reach C.

  If it is the execution timing of releasing the volume limit, the process advances to step S1905 to release the volume limit for the speaker whose volume is limited. Here, in accordance with the position of the volume switch 111 being on the scale F, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is returned to the maximum value for each of the speakers 91 and 101. It should be noted that the speakers whose volume restrictions are released in this processing include not only the speakers whose sound cracks are to be eliminated, but also speakers which are not sound crack elimination targets (speakers whose volume is limited in the volume harmony processing). Here, when the volume restriction is released for the speaker that is not the target of sound break-up elimination, the volume harmony flag (the flag set in step S1808 of the volume harmony processing) set for that speaker is cleared.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1904, or after the processing of step S1905 is executed, the volume limit releasing process of the effect sound is directly ended without releasing the volume limit.

  If it is the end timing of the sound cracking effect (YES in step S1903), the flow advances to step S1904 to clear the sound cracking effect flag. By performing this process, the data that the sound cracking effect was being performed will be reset.

  In step S1907, similarly to step S1905, the volume limit of the effect sound of the speaker whose volume is limited is released. Here, in accordance with the position of the volume switch 111 being on the scale F, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is set to the maximum value for each of the speakers 91 and 101. In addition, the volume restriction is released for both the speaker for which sound cracking is eliminated and the speaker for which sound cracking is not eliminated, and the volume harmony flag is cleared for speakers for which sound cracking is not eliminated.

  In step S1908, the effect sound limit counter S is cleared. By performing this process, the data that the volume of the effect sound was limited is reset.

  When the sound cracking effect is not performed (NO in step S1902), the process proceeds to step S1909, and it is determined whether or not the variable display (game time) is in the normal game state. That is, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed since the variable display of the symbols was started on the symbol display device 41, and when the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display is being performed. If the variable display is in progress, the process advances to step S1910 to determine whether or not the current variable display ends. Here, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed since the variable display of the symbols was started, and when the variable display time has elapsed, the variable display is terminated.

  When the current variable display is ended, the processes of steps S1907 and S1908 are executed in the same manner as after the process of step S1906 is executed. As a result, even if the sound breaking effect is not performed, the volume limit is canceled with the end of the variable display as a break.

  If the variable display is not being performed, the process advances to step S1911, and it is determined whether it is time to release the volume restriction of the effect sound. Here, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal gaming state, and if it is in the normal gaming state, the elapsed period from the start of the sound volume limitation of the effect sound is longer than the production time limit normal limitation period ( For example, it is determined whether 10 seconds have passed, and the timing when the elapsed period has passed the normal limit period is set as the volume limit release timing. In addition, when it is not the normal game state, that is, in the opening/closing execution mode (special game state), it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is ended, and the timing of ending the opening/closing execution mode is set to the volume limit Release timing.

  When it is time to release the volume limit of the effect sound, the process advances to step S1912, and similarly to steps S1905 and S1907, the volume limit of the speaker whose volume is limited is released. Here, in accordance with the position of the volume switch 111 being on the scale F, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is returned to the maximum value for each of the speakers 91 and 101. In addition, the volume restriction is released for both the speaker for which sound cracking is eliminated and the speaker for which sound cracking is not eliminated, and the volume harmony flag is cleared for speakers for which sound cracking is not eliminated.

  Here, with respect to each sound signal of the fraudulent sound, the guide sound, and the effect sound output from the speakers 91 and 101, the manner in which the actual sound volume level is changed when the sound volume restriction is executed and canceled is referred to FIG. 38. I will explain. FIG. 38 is a time chart exemplifying a change mode of the actual volume level of the speakers 91 and 101. (a) shows a time chart of the fraudulent sound, (b) shows a time chart of the guide sound, The time chart of the effect sound when the sound breaking effect is not performed is shown in (c), and the time chart of the effect sound when the sound breaking effect is being performed is shown in (d).

  Note that, in FIG. 38, as in FIG. 36, the vertical axis represents the actual volume level, and the hold value of the volume level of the sound signal is illustrated as the actual volume level. In addition, in (a) to (d), a change mode of the actual volume level is illustrated for the speaker in which sound cracking occurs among the speakers 91 and 101.

  In FIG. 38(a), at timing T7, the output of the fraudulent sound is started from the speaker, and at the same time, the actual volume level exceeds the allowable input level (reference level), and sound cracking occurs. There is. On the other hand, the sound volume is not limited for the speaker in which the sound crack has occurred, and the sound crack continues to be generated until the output of the fraudulent sound is ended at timing T8. In this case, output of the fraudulent sound at a high volume so that it can be heard by the hall manager is prioritized over suppressing the occurrence of sound cracking due to the fraudulent sound. The volume is not reduced until the output of the fraudulent sound is completed. As a result, it is possible to surely notify the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of fraud by using a loud sound of fraud.

  In FIG. 38(b), at timing T9, the guide sound is started to be output from the speaker, and at the same time, the actual volume level exceeds the allowable input level, and sound cracking occurs. On the other hand, the volume is limited for the speaker with the sound being broken. Specifically, the amplification factor of the speaker with sound cracking is gradually reduced, and at time T10 when the gain is reduced by two steps, the actual volume level falls below the allowable input level, and the sound cracking is eliminated. It The volume limit is continued until the output of the guide sound is finished at timing T11.

  In this case, since the volume of the guide sound is gradually reduced, the volume of the guide sound is set to such a level that the sound is not broken from the beginning (for example, the position of the volume switch 111 corresponds to the scale 5). Unlike the case where the sound is distorted or the volume of the guide sound is reduced to a level where the sound is not distorted after the sound breaks up, a volume that is as large as possible can be secured within the range where the sound does not break. As a result, even if the guide sound output from the speakers 91 and 101 is a voice message, it is possible to secure a sufficient volume for listening, and it is possible to prevent the message from becoming difficult to hear due to sound cracking. it can.

  When the output sound is the guide sound, if even one of the speakers 91 and 101 causes sound cracking, volume limitation is performed on all the speakers.

  In FIGS. 38(c) and 38(d), when the variable display corresponding to any of the super reach A to C is started, the actual volume level of the effect sound exceeds the allowable input level at the same time as the start. , Sound cracks are occurring.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38C, when the lottery for the sound splitting effect is not won and the sound splitting effect is not performed, the sound splitting is started at timing T12, and then the sound splitting is started. Volume limits are enforced for cracked speakers. Specifically, when the speaker with the sound crack is in the sound break continuation state, the amplification factor of the speaker is gradually reduced, and at the timing T13 when the amplification factor is reduced by 3 stages, the actual volume level is reduced. Is below the allowable input level, and the sound crack is eliminated. Here, since the sound breaking effect is not performed, the volume limitation is continued until the current variation display is finished at timing T14. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to sound breakage during variable display.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38D, when the lottery for the sound splitting effect is won and the sound splitting effect is performed, the sound splitting is started after the occurrence of the sound splitting at the timing T15, and the speaker having the sound splitting is started. The volume limit is temporarily set. Specifically, when the speaker with sound cracking is in the sound cracking continuous state, at a timing T16 when the elapsed period after the sound cracking exceeds the production sound cracking period La, the amplification factor of the sound cracking speaker. Is started gradually, and at timing T17 when the amplification factor is reduced by 3 steps, the actual volume level falls below the allowable input level, and the sound crack is eliminated. Then, at the timing T18 when the duration period during which the volume limit is performed from the timing T17 exceeds the production limitation period Lb, the volume limit is released. It should be noted that the effect sound cracking period La and the effect limit period Lb are set to have the same size (for example, 2 seconds).

  At the timing T18, if sound cracking occurs again with the release of the sound volume restriction, the sound volume restriction is performed again after waiting for the production sound cracking period La to elapse, as in the period of timings T15 to T18. After the usage limitation period Lb has elapsed, the volume limitation is canceled again. In this case, until the timing T19 at which the current variable display is ended, the state in which the sound crack is generated without limiting the volume and the state in which the sound crack is not generated by limiting the volume are repeated. In this way, by repeatedly causing sound breaks at a predetermined cycle, it is possible to increase the expectation of winning during the reach effect, as compared with the case where no sound break effect is won.

  Regardless of whether or not the sound cracking effect is performed, when the sound cracking of the effect sound is eliminated, the volume of the effect sound is gradually reduced as in the case of eliminating the sound cracking of the guide sound. Therefore, it is possible to secure a volume that is as large as possible within a range in which the generated sound does not break. As a result, with respect to the effect sound output from the speakers 91 and 101, it is possible to secure a sufficient volume for enhancing the effect, and it is possible to prevent the sound quality from becoming unpleasant to the player due to sound cracking.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

<Regarding the configuration in which the branch path 176 branches from the speaker path 135>
Since the sound crack detection circuit 175 is provided for the speakers 91 and 101, it is possible to detect that sound is broken in the output sound from the speakers 91 and 101. This makes it possible to reduce the amplification factor in the amplifier 171 and eliminate the sound crack in accordance with the timing when the sound break occurs in the speakers 91 and 101.

  Moreover, since the sound break detection circuit 175 is connected to the branch path 176 from the speaker path 135 to which the speakers 91 and 101 are connected, the sound break detection circuit 175 is actually input to the speakers 91 and 101. It is possible to detect a sound crack for a sound signal that is generated. In this case, as compared with the configuration in which the speakers 91, 101 and the sound breakage detection circuits 175 are individually connected to the amplifier 171, the sound breakage detection circuit 175 detects the occurrence of sound breaks in the speakers 91, 101. The accuracy can be increased. As a result, the sound breakage detection circuit 175 erroneously detects sound breakage even though no sound breakup occurs in the speakers 91 and 101, and the sound breakup detection circuit does not occur even though sound breakup occurs. By 175, it is possible to suppress that the sound crack is not detected.

  When the sound breakage detection circuit 175 detects sound breakup in the speakers 91, 101, the sound volume is limited for the speakers 91, 101, so that the sound break can be promptly eliminated. Moreover, the volume limitation is realized by the sub MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72 reducing the amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplifier 171, so that, for example, unlike the configuration of notifying the occurrence of sound crack, the hole management is performed. It is possible to prevent the person or the like from operating the volume switch 111 to reduce the volume and delaying the timing of reducing the output volume from the speakers 91 and 101 with respect to the timing when the sound crack occurs. That is, it is possible to quickly eliminate the sound breakup in the speakers 91 and 101.

  When sound breaks occur in the speakers 91 and 101, it is possible to prevent the output sound volume from the speakers 91 and 101 from being excessively reduced by performing sound volume restriction in multiple stages. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having an uncomfortable feeling that the guide sound and the effect sound are hard to hear and the game property is deteriorated.

  When sound volume is limited in multiple stages due to the occurrence of sound cracking, a sound cracking determination as to whether sound cracking has occurred is performed each time the sound volume is limited, and therefore the sound signal volume level is It is possible to suppress that the volume is further limited even though the reference level is not exceeded. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the output volume from the speakers 91 and 101 from becoming excessively low.

  Since the sound break continuation determination period is secured as a waiting period between the first volume limit and the next volume limit due to the occurrence of sound cracking, the sound volume limit is not reduced by a plurality of steps at once. The output volume can be gradually reduced by multiplying the number of times the volume is limited by the sound break continuation determination period. Therefore, it is possible to alleviate the uncomfortable feeling given to the player by reducing the output volume all at once.

  When a sound crack is detected by the sound crack detection circuit 175, the sound volume is limited on the condition that the duration of the sound crack reaches the sound crack continuation determination period. Therefore, even if noise occurs in the sound signal only for a moment. There is no volume limit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the output volume from the speakers 91 and 101 from being excessively reduced due to excessive reaction to the noise of the sound signal. Moreover, it is possible to measure the duration of sound cracking by using the waiting period secured between the one-step volume limitation and the next-one volume limitation. In this case, unlike the configuration in which the timing for measuring the duration of sound cracking and the standby period are arranged in chronological order, the timing for measuring sound cracking and the standby period are secured simultaneously in time series, so It is not necessary to secure an extra period or volume limit.

  In the sound break detection circuit 175, since the volume level of the sound signal and the reference level are compared by the comparator 202, the responsivity of sound break detection can be improved as compared with the configuration in which the operational amplifier is used for comparison. Therefore, in the configuration in which the sound breakage detection circuit 175 and the speakers 91 and 101 are connected in parallel to the amplifier 171, the sound breakup detection circuit 175 detects the sound breakage at the speakers 91 and 101. It is possible to suppress the delay in the timing of sound break detection.

  Since the reference voltage Va as the reference level is a constant voltage by the voltage generation unit 201, it is possible to suppress the reference level from increasing or decreasing due to fluctuations in the power supply voltage. As a result, the reference level can be kept constant according to the allowable input levels of the speakers 91 and 101. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detection accuracy of the sound breakage detection circuit 175 from being lowered due to fluctuations in the power supply voltage. Moreover, since the reference voltage Va as the constant voltage has a voltage value smaller than the terminal voltage Vcc applied to the +V terminal 208, compared to the case where the reference voltage Va is generated by boosting the terminal voltage Vcc. The circuit configuration for generating the reference voltage Va can be simplified.

  Since the peak hold unit 182 holds the peak value of the sound signal as the hold value, the comparator 202 can compare the peak value of the sound signal with the reference level. Therefore, it is possible to avoid that the sound break detection circuit 175 cannot detect the occurrence of sound break even though the peak value of the sound signal is larger than the reference level.

  In the peak hold unit 182, the diode 192 can regulate that the charging voltage of the hold capacitor 191 decreases due to spontaneous discharge. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an error between the hold value of the peak hold unit 182 and the peak value of the actual sound signal.

  In the peak hold unit 182, since the diode 192 is incorporated in the buffer unit 193 having the feedback circuit of the operational amplifier 194, even if the volume level of the sound signal is smaller than the forward voltage of the diode 192, the hold capacitor 191 is generated by the sound signal. Can be charged. That is, the peak value of the sound signal can be held as the hold value.

  The reset unit 183 can repeatedly hold the peak value of each sound signal as a hold value by deleting the hold value held by the peak hold unit 182 to zero. Since the hold value for each time is repeatedly input to the comparator 202, the comparator 202 can compare the peak value of the sound signal for each time with the reference level.

  Since the hold capacitor 191 is electrically connected to one of the discharging unit 211 and the comparator 202 by the changeover switch 214 and is cut off from the other, the hold capacitor 191 is held while discharging the hold capacitor 191. The charging voltage of the capacitor 191 is prevented from being input to the comparator 202. As a result, it is possible to prevent the accuracy of comparison by the comparator 202 from being lowered by comparing the charging voltage of the hold capacitor 191 with the reference level during the reset of the peak hold unit 182.

  Moreover, since the changeover switch 214 is switched by the oscillation circuit 217 in a predetermined cycle, it is possible to repeatedly discharge the hold capacitor 191 and input the hold value from the hold capacitor 191 to the comparator 202. Further, since the discharge unit 211 grounds the hold capacitor 191 via the discharge resistor 213, it is possible to prevent a large current from flowing to the discharge unit 211 when the hold capacitor 191 is discharged. Therefore, the reset unit 183 can appropriately discharge the hold capacitor 191.

  The hold value reset operation by the reset unit 183 is performed immediately after the sub MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72 executes the notification and effect control processing (sound cracking determination in steps S1503 and S1703), and thus the hold value is reset. At the timing when the maximum value of the sound signal is held as the hold value in one cycle (one cycle of the oscillation circuit 217), the sub MPU 142 determines the comparison result between the hold value and the reference level as the detection result of the sound crack detection circuit 175. Will get it. Therefore, when the sound breakage detection circuit 175 detects the occurrence of sound breakup, the sub MPU 142 can reliably receive the sound breakup signal output from the sound breakup detection circuit 175. As a result, the accuracy of the sound break determination (the processing of steps S1503 and S1703) executed in the notification and effect control processing can be increased.

  On the other hand, for example, when the hold value reset operation is performed immediately before the execution of the notification and effect control processing, the peak hold unit 182 holds the peak value of the sound signal in one cycle of the oscillation circuit 217. The sub MPU 142 acquires the result of comparison between the hold value after clearing the peak value and the reference level. Therefore, even if the sound breakage detection circuit 175 detects the occurrence of sound breakup, there is a high possibility that the sub MPU 142 cannot receive the sound breakup signal output from the sound breakup detection circuit 175. As a result, the accuracy of the sound breakage determination becomes low.

<Differences in the installation targets of the speakers 91 and 101 and the common ROM 147>
Since the sound breakage detection circuit 175 detects the sound breakup in the speakers 91 and 101, it is possible to eliminate the sound breakup at the timing when the sound breakup occurs. In this case, even if the output sound is a sound with a large intonation such as having a large volume portion and a non-loud volume portion, the volume of the large volume portion can be reduced to eliminate sound cracks. It is possible to prevent the volume from becoming excessively low for the portion. Therefore, for sound data created by a designer or the like, the upper speaker 91 and the lower speaker 101 are provided in the front door frame 14 and the outer frame 11, and the common ROM 147 for storing the sound data is provided in the inner frame 13. Due to this, even if the balance of the volume level between the loud volume portion and the non-loud volume portion does not match the performance (allowable input level) of the loudspeakers 91 and 101, the production sound or the like is produced from the loudspeakers 91 and 101. It can be output appropriately. As a result, when a designer or the like creates sound data, it is possible to prevent the degree of freedom in creating the sound data from decreasing.

  Since the sound breakage detection circuit 175 is provided in the inner frame 13, when the new inner frame 13 is installed due to the model change of the pachinko machine 10, the speakers 91 and 101 are installed in the existing pachinko machine together with the front door frame 14 and the like. Even if it is diverted from the machine 10, the sound crack detection circuit 175 can be newly installed in the pachinko machine 10. Moreover, in the configuration in which the sound crack detection circuit 175 is provided in the sound/light control device 72 together with the common ROM 147, the sound crack detection circuit 175 is installed in the pachinko machine 10 before the designers create sound data. It will be possible to know. Thereby, the designer or the like can create the sound data after recognizing that the degree of freedom in creating the sound data for outputting the effect sound or the like is high.

  Furthermore, in the configuration in which the sound breakage detection circuit 175 is provided in the inner frame 13, the wiring (the wiring forming the speaker path 135 and the branch path 176) connecting the sound breakage detection circuit 175 and the sound/light control device 72 is internally provided. Since the frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are not in a state of straddling each other, the wiring thereof is illegally cut, and an unauthorized board is connected to the sound/light control device 72 in place of the sound breakage detection circuit 175. It is possible to exert a deterrent against the sound/light control device 72 being illegally controlled by the illegal substrate.

  In the pachinko machine 10 in which the speakers 91, 101 are provided in the front door frame 14, the amplifier 171 is provided in the inner frame 13, so that the rated output of the amplifier 171 and the allowable input level of the speakers 91, 101 match. Although there is a concern that sound cracking may occur in the speakers 91 and 101 due to the absence of sound, the sound cracking detection circuit 175 detects the sound cracking, so that the sound cracking can be preferably eliminated.

  When the output volume from the speakers 91 and 101 is limited in order to eliminate the sound cracks in the speakers 91 and 101, the volume limitation is normally limited to the timing at which the variable display ends or the duration of the volume limitation. Since it is canceled at the timing when the sound reaches, it is possible to eliminate the sound cracking in the large volume part of the output sound, and avoid excessively reducing the volume in the non-loud volume part. In this case, it is possible to prevent the non-loud volume part from becoming difficult to hear, and to suppress the reduction of the effect of the effect that is exhibited by the intonation of the effect sound or the like.

  When the output volume from the speakers 91 and 101 is limited for the purpose of eliminating the sound crack of the guide sound, the limitation of the output volume is canceled at the timing of ending the output of the guide sound, which causes the sound break. It is possible to avoid that the volume limitation continues even after the output of the guide sound that has been output has ended. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sound volume of other types of sounds such as effect sounds output after the output of the guide sound from being excessively reduced, even if sound cracking has not occurred. That is, it is possible to prevent the effect of another sound different from the guide sound from being reduced after the sound breakup of the guide sound is eliminated.

  When the output volume from the speakers 91 and 101 is limited for the purpose of eliminating the sound cracking of the effect sound, the limitation of the output sound volume is released at the timing when the variable display ends each time, which causes the sound cracking. It is possible to avoid that the volume limitation is continued even though the variable display that has been completed is ended. As a result, it is possible to reduce the volume of other effect sounds and notification sounds that have been output after the variable display, in which sound cracking has occurred, even though sound cracking has not occurred. It can be avoided. That is, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect sound corresponding to the next variable display from being lowered after the sound distortion of the effect sound is eliminated for the current variable display.

  In the sound breakage detection circuit 175, the reference level, which is a standard for determining whether or not sound breakup occurs, can be changed according to the allowable input level of the speakers 91 and 101. It is possible to avoid that the allowable input levels of the speakers 91 and 101 do not match the reference level regardless of the manufacturer or type. Therefore, when the volume level of the sound signal generated by the sound data does not match the allowable input level of the speakers 91 and 101, or when the allowable input level of the speakers 91 and 101 includes a tolerance, the speaker By setting the reference level in accordance with the actual permissible input levels of 91 and 101, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the sound crack generation by the sound crack detection circuit 175.

  In the sound break detection circuit 175, since the voltage value of the reference voltage Va generated by the voltage generation unit 201 is set to the reference level, the reference level is easily changed by changing the voltage value of the reference voltage Va. be able to. The reference voltage Va can be changed by a simple operation of changing the resistance value of the second resistor R2 that is a variable resistor in the voltage generation unit 201.

  Since the voltage generator 201 is configured to include the shunt regulator 203, it is possible to improve the holding accuracy of holding the voltage value (reference level) of the reference voltage Va at a predetermined value. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the reference level is changed and the detection accuracy of the sound breakage detection circuit 175 is lowered. In the voltage generator 201, the first resistor R1 of the first resistor R1 and the second resistor R2 connected in series is the fixed resistor, and therefore, unlike the configuration in which the first resistor R1 is the variable resistor, It can be avoided that the resistance value of the first resistor R1 is increased and the power loss in the first resistor R1 is increased due to the reference current flowing through the reference of the shunt regulator 203.

  Since the operation knob 112 for adjusting the reference level of the sound crack detection circuit 175 is provided on the outer peripheral surface of the sound/light control device 72, for example, the initial value of the reference level (when the pachinko machine 10 is delivered to the game hall). Even if the reference level value of 1) does not match the allowable input levels of the speakers 91 and 101, the reference level can be easily changed to a value compatible with the allowable input levels of the speakers 91 and 101. Moreover, since the operation knob 112 is arranged at a position that does not overlap the switch opening 113 formed in the back pack 73, the operation knob 112 is erroneously operated by a player or the like after the reference level is once set. It is possible to prevent the reference level from being changed unintentionally. On the other hand, when the reference level is changed, the operation knob 112 is exposed to the back side of the pachinko machine by an easy work of opening the back pack unit 15 with respect to the inner frame 13, so that the operation knob 112 is operated. Can be prevented from becoming excessively difficult. Therefore, the hall manager can appropriately manage the reference level.

<About having a plurality of speakers 91 and 101>
Since the sound breakage detection circuit 175 is individually provided for each of the speakers 91 and 101, the sound volume is limited for the speaker in which the sound breakup occurs, and the sound volume is set for the speaker in which no sound breakup occurs. It is possible not to impose restrictions. Therefore, when sound cracks are generated in some of the speakers 91 and 101, the sound cracks can be eliminated, and moreover, the output sound of all the speakers is reduced to have the output sound. It can be avoided that the effect is reduced.

  Since the operation knobs 112 are individually provided in the sound crack detection circuits 175, the reference level can be individually set for each of the sound crack detection circuits 175 by operating each of the operation knobs 112. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the sound crack occurrence for each of the sound crack detection circuits 175.

  By limiting the volume of the speakers 91 and 101 in which the sound breakage detection circuit 175 has detected the occurrence of sound breakup, the sound breakup can be quickly eliminated. Moreover, the volume limitation is realized by the sub MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72 reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier 171, so that the hall manager, the player, or the like can adjust the volume switch 111 in order to eliminate the sound distortion. There is no need to perform operations such as operating.

  When sound cracking occurs in some of the speakers 91 and 101, the volume is limited not only in the speaker in which sound cracking has occurred but also in the speaker in which sound cracking has not occurred. Therefore, the difference in sound volume between the speaker with sound cracking and the speaker without sound cracking does not become excessively large. As a result, when the mid-high range sound output from the upper speaker 91 is cracked, the volume is reduced by only the mid-high range sound and only the low range sound output from the lower side speaker 101 is conspicuous. When the low-pitched sound output from 101 has sound cracking, it can be suppressed that the volume is reduced only by the low-pitched sound and only the middle and high-pitched sound output from the upper speaker 91 is conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to keep the balance of the volume suitable between the speaker in which the sound is broken and the speaker in which the sound is not broken.

  Since the decrease range of the output volume of the speaker in which the sound crack is not generated is smaller than the decrease range of the output volume of the speaker in which the sound crack is generated, the output of all the speakers 91 and 101 is reduced. Unlike the case where the volume reduction amount is made uniform, it is possible to eliminate the sound crack while suppressing the reduction of the effect of the output sound.

  In addition to the speaker with sound cracking, the volume limitation is performed in multiple steps not only for the speaker without sound cracking, but the output volume of the speaker without sound cracking becomes excessively low. Can be suppressed. Moreover, since the number of steps for reducing the volume of the speaker in which the sound crack has not occurred is smaller than the number of steps for reducing the volume of the speaker in which the sound crack has occurred, all the speakers 91. , 101 can be prevented from being simply reduced and the effect or the like is reduced.

  When sound cracking occurs in each of the speakers 91 and 101, and when there are a plurality of speakers in which sound cracking does not occur, volume limitation is individually performed for those speakers, and thus all speakers in which sound cracking does not occur. It is possible to appropriately balance the output volumes of the speakers while suppressing the output volume of the speakers from being simply reduced to lower the effect of production.

  Moreover, when the upper speaker 91 and the lower speaker 101 are included in the speaker in which the sound is not broken, the lowering range of the output volume between the upper speaker 91 and the lower speaker 101 is made different. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable in how the output sounds from the upper speaker 91 and the lower speaker 101 are heard. This is because it is considered that the upper speaker 91 and the lower speaker 101 have different distances to the player's head and that the sounds output from the speakers 91 and 101 are different.

  In addition, since the upper speaker 91 that outputs middle and high tones and the lower speaker 101 that outputs low tones have different output sound pitches (frequency bands), the upper speaker 91 and the lower speaker 101 can reduce the output volume. It is possible to prevent the player from having a discomfort in how to hear the middle and high pitched sounds and the low pitched sound. This is because it is considered that the sounds output from the speakers 91 and 101 are heard differently between middle and high tones and low tones.

  When sound cracking occurs in at least one of the upper speakers 91 and no sound cracking occurs in each of the lower speakers 101, the lower speaker 101 is taken as a set and the output volume reduction range is the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of discomfort in the low tone by making the lowering volumes of the lower speakers 101 that output low tones different from each other. Also, from the common point that each lower speaker 101 is arranged in the lower part of the front door frame 14, the output volume from each lower speaker 101 is not changed by making the reduction range of the output volume from each lower speaker 101 different. It makes it difficult for the sound to be heard in a strange manner.

<Regarding the configuration in which the volume limit processing is performed when sound cracking occurs>
When the sound crack detection circuit 175 detects the sound break, the sub MPU 142 performs the sound volume limiting process (the processes of steps S1508 and S1710) on the speakers 91 and 101 in which the sound break is generated. Can be resolved promptly. Specifically, when the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F, the output volume is reduced with the occurrence of sound cracking, so that sound cracking can be promptly eliminated. On the other hand, when the position of the volume switch 111 is not on the scale F, the volume limiting process is not performed even if the sound crack occurs, so that maintaining the sound volume is prioritized over eliminating the sound crack. be able to. This means that operating the volume switch 111 selects which of the elimination of sound cracking and the maintenance of the output volume is prioritized for the output sound from the speakers 91 and 101. Moreover, the selection can be performed by an easy operation of operating the volume switch 111.

  When the output sound from the speakers 91 and 101 is a production sound, volume control is performed for the purpose of eliminating sound cracks on condition that the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F, so that the pachinko machine 10 has a gaming property. Depending on the contribution of the effect sound to the enhancement of the sound level, the hall manager or the like can appropriately select which one of the elimination of the sound crack and the maintenance of the volume is prioritized by operating the volume switch 111. ..

  Moreover, if the output sound is a production sound and the position of the volume switch 111 is not set to the scale F, it is determined whether or not the occurrence of sound crack is detected by the sound crack detection circuit 175 (steps S1503 and S1703). Processing) is not performed, the processing load on the sub MPU 142 can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the sound break determination is performed even when the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F.

  When the output sound is a fraudulently generated sound, even if the fraudulently generated sound has a sound crack and the position of the volume switch 111 is set to the scale F, the volume limitation for eliminating the sound crack is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the volume of the fraudulent sound is reduced and the fraudulent sound becomes less noticeable than the effect sound of the other pachinko machine 10. That is, it is possible to suppress the reduction of the fraud notification effect peculiar to the fraud sound. Moreover, when the output sound is an illegally generated sound, the sound cracking determination is not performed regardless of the position of the volume switch 111. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which the sound cracking determination is performed even when the output sound is the illegally generated sound. Thus, the processing load on the sub MPU 142 can be reduced.

  When the output sound is a guide sound, if the guide sound has a sound crack, volume limitation for the purpose of eliminating the sound crack is forcibly forced even if the position of the volume switch 111 is not set to the scale F. Therefore, even if the guide sound is a voice message, it is possible to prevent the voice message from being difficult to hear due to sound cracking. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the guidance effect peculiar to the guidance sound by the voice message from being lowered.

  When the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F, the amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplifier 171 is set to a value larger than that when the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale 5, so that the output sound is cracked. Although it is more likely to occur, for the hall manager or the like, setting the position of the volume switch 111 to the scale F gives priority to eliminating sound cracks in the effect sound and setting the output volume. You will be doing both. Therefore, the work of setting the output volume and the setting for eliminating the sound distortion can be facilitated by the volume switch 111.

  Here, since the volume switch 111 is provided on the back side of the inner frame 13 so that it is difficult for the player to operate, the hall manager can suitably manage the state of the volume switch 111. On the other hand, since the hall manager needs to open the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 in order to operate the volume switch 111, it is suitable for the hall manager that the work related to the volume switch 111 is facilitated. is there.

  The volume switch 111 has a function of allowing the hall administrator or the like to variably set the output volume from the speakers 91 and 101, in addition to the function of selecting whether or not to limit the volume for the purpose of eliminating sound distortion. Therefore, the number of members for imparting both functions to the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which dedicated operating means having those functions are individually provided. This makes it possible to reduce the cost burden and the number of assembly steps of the pachinko machine 10.

  Since the volume switch 111 and the sound crack detection circuit 175 are connected to the sound/light control device 72 instead of the main control device 71, it is assumed that the unauthorized substrate is the sound/light control device 72 instead of the sound volume switch 111 and the sound break detection circuit 175. Even if it is connected to, it is possible to avoid the illegal control of the main controller 71 by the illegal board to illegally win the big hit lottery or shift to the special game state. As a result, it is possible to favorably provide the pachinko machine 10 provided with the volume switch 111 and the sound breakage detection circuit 175 with a measure against illegally granting a privilege.

<Sound crack judgment for judging that sound crack has occurred>
When the sound breakage detection circuit 175 detects the occurrence of sound breakup in the effect sound, the sub MPU 142 determines whether or not sound breakup has occurred, so that the sound is generated at a timing suitable for each game situation. It is possible to suitably eliminate the crack. When a sound crack occurs in the effect sound, the timing of canceling the sound crack is made different each time, so that the sound crack can be continued and the expectation for a jackpot can be increased. That is, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect sound due to the sound breakup.

  Differentiating the production sound by sound cracking because the duration from the occurrence of sound cracking for the production sound until the resolution of the sound cracking is different depending on whether or not the lottery is selected. be able to. When you win the lottery for sound cracking production, sound cracking is continued only for the sound cracking period for production, so by comparing with the case where the sound cracking is quickly resolved without winning the lottery, it is originally If so, the effect of the effect sound can be enhanced by the phenomenon of sound cracking that would give the player an unpleasant feeling.

  Here, the waveforms of the sounds output from the speakers 91 and 101 are different depending on whether or not the sound crack is generated even for the effect sound formed from one sound data. .. That is, one sound data is used to output a plurality of types of effect sounds having different timbres. In this case, the types of effect sounds output from the speakers 91 and 101 are increased without increasing the sound data stored in the common ROM 147 of the sound/light control device 72, so that the capacity of the common ROM 147 is increased. It is possible to diversify the effect sound without increasing it, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect sound.

  In the state where the volume of the effect sound is limited for the purpose of eliminating sound cracking, when the lottery for the sound cracking effect is not won, the volume limit is continued for a longer normal limit period than when the lottery is won. Therefore, it is highly possible that the high volume part of the effect sound has ended at the timing when the volume restriction is released, and it is possible to prevent the sound cracking from occurring again at that timing. In this case, since it is unlikely that the volume limitation will be performed again at the timing when the volume limitation is released, it is possible to prevent the execution and the release of the volume limitation from being repeated. Therefore, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of sound cracks in the effect sound.

  On the other hand, when the lottery for the sound crackling production is won, the volume limit is continued only for a shorter production period than when the lottery is not won, so the volume of the production sound is large when the volume limit is released. There is a high possibility that the sound has not ended, and at that timing the sound is likely to crack again. In this case, the volume limitation is performed again at the timing when the volume limitation is released, and execution and removal of the volume limitation are likely to be repeated, and the player can easily recognize that the repetition is intentional. That is, it is possible to enhance the playability by making the player recognize the sound cracking effect.

  Since the lottery for the sound cracking effect is performed based on the winning in the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34, the sound is distorted by the effect sound while the variable display of the symbols is being performed on the symbol display device 41. If it has occurred, a sound cracking effect can be executed. As a result, the degree of expectation for the stop result of the variable display can be further increased by the sound break effect. Moreover, even in the variable display of the symbols, the sound cracking effect is performed in accordance with the reach effect, which is suitable for increasing the degree of expectation of the stop result of the variable display. Furthermore, even in the variable display of the symbols, the sound splitting effect is performed in accordance with the effects of the super reach A to C, which is even more preferable in increasing the degree of expectation for the stop result of the variable display.

  When the sound cracking effect is performed in accordance with the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41, the total of the effect sound cracking period and the effect limiting period, which is the duration of the occurrence and elimination of the sound cracking, is the symbol. Since it is set to be smaller than 1/2 of the fluctuation display period of, it is possible to repeat the generation and elimination of the sound crack in the sound cracking effect a plurality of times. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the sound cracking effect is being performed.

  Since the sound cracking effect is ended in accordance with the end of the variable display of the symbols, for example, compared with the configuration in which the sound cracking effect is performed regardless of whether the variable display is executed, the case where the variable display is performed It is possible to differentiate the effect sound from the case without being distorted by the sound cracking effect. For this reason, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of expectation for the big hit during the variable display by the sound break effect.

<Second Embodiment>
In the second embodiment, the configuration of the sound breakage detection circuit 175 is different from that in the first embodiment, and the configuration of the sound breakup detection circuit 175 will be described with reference to FIG. The difference will be mainly described. FIG. 39 is a circuit diagram showing an electrical configuration of the sound breakage detection circuit 175 according to the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the FET 221 is provided as a rectifying element in the peak hold unit 182 of the sound breakage detection circuit 175. The FET 221 is a junction-type field effect transistor (JFET), and has a gate structure, a source structure, and a drain structure that have a diode structure. In this diode structure, leakage current flowing in the reverse direction is extremely small. The FET 221 is arranged in the forward direction on the upstream side of the hold capacitor 191 in a state where the source and the drain are connected. In the FET 221, the gate is connected to the output side of the operational amplifier 194, and the source and drain are connected to the input side of the hold capacitor 191.

  Like the diode 192 in the first embodiment, the FET 221 restricts the negative side current of the sound signal from flowing into the hold capacitor 191, while allowing the positive side current to flow into the hold capacitor 191. is doing. Here, the FET 221 has a smaller leakage current flowing in the opposite direction than the diode 192, and when the peak value of the sound signal is held as the hold value by the charging voltage of the hold capacitor 191, the hold capacitor 191 is held. It is difficult for the current to flow backward. That is, the charging voltage of the hold capacitor 191 does not easily decrease. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an error between the hold value of the sound signal held by the peak hold unit 182 and the actual peak value of the sound signal.

  The switch unit 212 of the reset unit 183 replaces the changeover switch 214 provided at the connection portion of the hold capacitor 191, the discharge unit 211, and the comparator 202, and has a switch provided at the connection portion of the hold capacitor 191 and the discharge unit 211. It has a switch 222. The changeover switch 222 can cut off the path connecting the hold capacitor 191 and the discharging unit 211, but does not cut off the path connecting the hold capacitor 191 and the comparator 202. That is, the hold capacitor 191 and the comparator 202 are in the conductive state regardless of the state of the changeover switch 222.

  When the switch unit 212 is in the OFF state because the current does not flow in the relay coil 215, the hold capacitor 191 is charged and the charge voltage is input to the comparator 202 as the hold value. On the other hand, when the switch unit 212 is in the ON state due to the current flowing through the relay coil 215, the hold unit 191 is discharged by the discharge unit 211, and the hold capacitor 191 is charged even during the discharge. The voltage is input to the comparator 202. Even in this case, the peak value of the sound signal can be compared with the reference level by the comparator 202 as the hold value of the peak hold unit 182 except during the discharge of the hold capacitor 191.

  The voltage generator 201 is provided with a Zener diode 223 instead of the shunt regulator 203. The Zener diode 223 is arranged in the opposite direction to the +V terminal 208, and the cathode of the Zener diode 223 is connected to the +V terminal 208 via the series resistor R0. The + input terminal of the comparator 202 is connected between the series resistor R0 and the Zener diode 223. In this case, the reverse voltage of the Zener diode 223 is set to the reference voltage Va, and thus the reference voltage Va is held at a predetermined voltage value.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the operation knob 112 is not provided for the voltage generation unit 201, and therefore work such as replacement of the Zener diode 223 is required to change the reference voltage Va. In this case, it is preferable to select the Zener diode 223 according to its reverse voltage so that the voltage value of the reference voltage Va becomes a value according to the allowable input level of the speakers 91, 101. As a result, the voltage value of the reference voltage Va becomes larger than the allowable input level of the speakers 91 and 101, and the volume level of the sound data is smaller than the reference level (reference voltage Va). It is possible to prevent the output sound from being cracked.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

  In the voltage generation unit 201 of the sound breakage detection circuit 175, the reference voltage Va is a constant voltage by the Zener diode 223, so that it is possible to suppress the reference level from increasing or decreasing due to power supply voltage fluctuations. Moreover, since the reference voltage Va is regulated by the reverse voltage of the Zener diode 223, the configuration is simplified as compared with the configuration in which the reference voltage Va is determined by the voltage dividing resistor provided for the shunt regulator 203, for example. be able to.

  In the configuration in which the discharge unit 211 is cut off from the hold capacitor 191 by the changeover switch 214, the hold capacitor 191 and the comparator 202 are not cut off, so the hold capacitor 191 always outputs the charging voltage to the comparator 202. You can

  Since the FET 221 that restricts the discharge from the hold capacitor 191 is connected to the hold capacitor 191 as a rectifying element, it is possible to minimize the generation of leakage current in the rectifying element. That is, it is possible to prevent the hold value from changing due to the spontaneous discharge in the hold capacitor 191.

<Third Embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, in the sound volume limit release process (process of step S1716) of the effect sound, when the volume limit is released, the process of returning the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 to the maximum value (steps S1905, S1907, S1912). However, in the third embodiment, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is gradually approached to the maximum value.

  Here, the third embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, the guide sound volume limit cancellation processing executed in step S1716 of the effect sound volume setting processing (FIG. 34) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the effect sound volume setting processing, first, in step S1913, it is determined whether or not the release flag is set. The release flag is a flag that is set in various flag storage areas of the RWM 145, and when set, indicates that release of the volume limit is permitted.

  If the release flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1901, and the processes of step S1901 and subsequent steps are executed as described in the first embodiment. However, in the second embodiment, instead of the process of canceling the sound volume restriction (the processes of steps S1905, S1907, S1912), the process of setting the cancellation flag (the processes of steps S1915 to S1917) is executed. In this case, at the timing when the amplification factor is instantaneously changed in the first embodiment, the cancellation flag indicating that the change of the amplification factor is permitted is set without instantaneously changing the amplification factor.

  If the cancellation flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1914, and the volume limitation step cancellation processing is executed assuming that the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is changed stepwise. The volume limitation stage canceling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41.

  In the volume limitation stage canceling process, it is determined in step S2001 whether or not the amplification factor holding timer counter Tc is set. The amplification factor holding timer counter Tc is a timer counter that is set in various counter storage areas of the RWM 145 corresponding to each of the speakers 91 and 101 whose volume is limited, and is set to 1 when releasing the volume limitation stepwise. It is for measuring the period during which the amplification factor is held in stages.

  If there is a speaker whose volume is limited, but the amplification factor holding timer counter Tc corresponding to the speaker is set, the process proceeds to step S2002, and the amplification factor holding timer is associated with the speaker whose volume is limited. The counter Tc is set to zero. By setting the amplification factor holding timer counter Tc, the measurement of the continuous period in which the current amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is held is started.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S2001, or after the processing of step S2002 has been executed, the operation proceeds to step S2003, in which the amplification factor holding timer counter Tc is incremented by 1 (Tc=Tc+1) for the speaker whose volume is limited. That is, the duration of the current amplification factor of the amplifier 171 of the speaker whose volume is limited is measured by the amplification factor holding timer counter Tc. Here, when a plurality of amplification factor holding timer counters Tc are set, all the amplification factor holding timer counters Tc are incremented by one. As a result, when there are a plurality of speakers whose volume is limited, the durations in which the amplification factors of all the speakers are held are individually measured.

  In step S2004, with respect to the speaker whose volume is limited, whether or not the amplification factor is changed by determining whether or not the retention period of the amplification factor exceeds a predetermined cancellation determination period (for example, 100 msec). Determine whether or not. Here, a predetermined value Nc (for example, 50) corresponding to the cancellation determination period is set in advance, it is determined whether or not the amplification factor holding timer counter Tc is larger than the predetermined value Nc (Tc>Nc), and Tc> When it is Nc, it is assumed that the holding period of the amplification factor exceeds the cancellation determination period. That is, it is assumed that the change of the amplification factor is permitted.

  When there are a plurality of speakers whose volume is limited, it is determined whether or not Tc>Nc is satisfied for each of the amplification factor holding timer counters Tc set corresponding to the respective speakers, and Tc> If there is even one speaker whose volume is limited to Nc, it is determined that there is at least one speaker for which the change of the amplification factor is permitted, and a positive determination is made in step S2004.

  If there is a speaker whose amplification factor is changed, the actual amplification factor of the speaker is acquired in step S2005, and the amplifier 171 is amplified in accordance with the position of the volume switch 111 on the scale F in step S2006. The maximum value of the rate is acquired as the target amplification rate. The target amplification factor may be a value corresponding to the scale 5, a value of 120% of the maximum value, or the like. The same applies to the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 that is set when the volume limit is released in the first embodiment.

  In step S2007, the difference between the actual amplification rate and the target amplification rate is calculated, and it is determined whether the difference is smaller than a predetermined rate K (for example, 5%). Here, it is determined whether the absolute value of the value obtained by subtracting the target amplification rate from the actual amplification rate is smaller than the predetermined rate K.

  If the difference between the actual amplification rate and the target amplification rate is smaller than the predetermined rate K, the process proceeds to step S2008, and the amplifier is set so that the actual amplification rate matches the target amplification rate for the speaker whose amplification rate is permitted to be changed. Change the amplification factor of 171.

  In step S2009, the amplification factor holding timer counter Tc is cleared assuming that the amplification factor has been changed for the speaker for which the change of the amplification factor is permitted. Through this process, for the speaker whose amplification factor is changed, the measurement of the continuous period in which the amplification factor is held is completed. In step S2010, regarding the speaker for which the change of the amplification factor is permitted, it is determined that the release of the volume limit for the purpose of eliminating the sound crack is completed, and the release flag set corresponding to the speaker is cleared.

  If the difference between the actual amplification rate and the target amplification rate is not smaller than the predetermined rate K, the process proceeds to step S2011, and it is determined whether the actual amplification rate is larger than the target amplification rate. When the actual amplification rate is larger than the target amplification rate, the process proceeds to step S2012, and the amplification rate of the amplifier 171 is reduced by the predetermined rate K for the speaker whose amplification rate is permitted to be changed. As a result, with respect to the speaker whose amplification factor is permitted to be changed, the actual amplification factor is changed by one step to the side closer to the target amplification factor.

  In step S2013, the amplification factor holding timer counter Tc is cleared in the same manner as in step S2009, assuming that the amplification factor has been changed by one step for the speaker for which the amplification factor change is permitted. In step S2014, it is determined whether or not the actual amplification factor and the target amplification factor have the same value for the speaker whose amplification factor has been changed in the immediately preceding step S2013. When the actual amplification factor and the target amplification factor are the same value, it is determined that the speaker whose amplification factor has been changed in step S2013 immediately before has been released from the volume limitation for the purpose of eliminating sound cracking, Clears the corresponding release flag that was set.

  On the other hand, for the speaker whose amplification factor has been changed in step S2013 immediately before, if the actual amplification factor and the target amplification factor are not the same value, the stage canceling process of the volume control is ended as it is. Since the release of the volume limitation has not been completed for this speaker, the amplification rate is changed again by repeatedly executing the step of releasing the volume limitation. In this case, the amplification factor is gradually reduced, and eventually the release of the volume limitation ends at the timing when the actual amplification factor and the target amplification factor match.

  If the actual amplification rate is smaller than the target amplification rate, the process proceeds to step S2015, and the amplification rate of the amplifier 171 is increased by the predetermined rate K for the speaker whose amplification rate change is permitted. As a result, with respect to the speaker whose amplification factor is permitted to be changed, the actual amplification factor is changed by one step to the side closer to the target amplification factor. After that, as in the case where the actual amplification rate is larger than the target amplification rate, the processing of steps S2013, S2014, and S2010 is performed, and even if the cancellation of the volume restriction is not completed in this process, the volume limitation step is performed. By repeatedly executing the cancellation processing, the amplification factor is gradually increased, and eventually the cancellation of the volume limitation ends at the timing when the actual amplification factor and the target amplification factor match.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

  When the volume limit is released with the aim of eliminating sound cracks in the effect sound, when the volume limit is released, the release is gradually performed in multiple stages. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the change in volume. In addition, since the change mode of the amplification rate when releasing the volume restriction is the same as the change mode of the amplification rate when the volume restriction for the purpose of eliminating sound cracks is performed in multiple stages, the volume limit of the effect sound is limited. Compared with the configuration in which the output sound volume change mode is different between when performing and canceling, the discomfort is less likely to occur with respect to the change in the volume of the effect sound.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows. By the way, the configurations of the following different modes may be applied individually or in combination with the configurations of the above respective embodiments.

  (A1) In the above-described first embodiment, the changeover switch 214 is provided at the connection portion between the hold capacitor 191, the discharge unit 211 and the comparator 202. However, the connection path between the hold capacitor 191 and the discharge unit 211, the hold A changeover switch 214 may be provided in each of the connection paths between the capacitor 191 and the comparator 202. Even in this case, each of the changeover switches 214 as the changeover unit can bring the hold capacitor 191 and the comparator 202 into the cutoff state when the connection target of the hold capacitor 191 is the discharge unit 211.

  Further, the changeover switch 214 as a changeover unit may not be connected to the hold capacitor 191. In this case, since the hold capacitor 191 is always in the conductive state with the discharging unit 211, the hold capacitor 191 is discharged, so that the peak value of the sound signal is less likely to be held, but the peak value of the sound signal is output from the hold capacitor 191 to the comparator. It is configured to be output to 202.

  (A2) In each of the above embodiments, the state of the changeover switch 214 is changed over at a predetermined cycle by the oscillation signal from the oscillation circuit 217, but the state of the changeover switch 214 may be changed at any timing. .. For example, the sub MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72 outputs a switching signal, and the state of the changeover switch 214 is switched according to the switching signal.

  In this configuration, the sub MPU 142 executes the reset process of resetting the hold value of the peak hold unit 182 in the volume setting process (the process of step S1109 of the notification and effect control process). In the reset process, an ON signal is output as a switching signal to the relay coil 215 to shift the switch unit 212 to the ON state to discharge the hold capacitor 191. The ON signal is a signal that keeps the switch section 212 in the ON state for a predetermined discharge period (for example, 0.6 msec), and thereby the hold capacitor 191 is continuously discharged for the discharge period. For this reason, the charging voltage of the hold capacitor 191 can be reliably made zero by discharging. The discharge period is shorter than the execution cycle (for example, 2 msec) of the notification and effect control processing.

  In the sound volume setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 42, if the output sound is the guide sound of the notification sound, the sub MPU 142 executes the amplification factor setting process of the amplifier (the process of step S1403) and then resets it in step S1409. Perform processing. If the output sound is an unauthorized sound generated from the notification sounds, the guide sound volume setting processing (processing in step S1404) is executed, and then the reset processing is executed in step S1410. Further, if the output sound is the effect sound, after performing the effect sound volume setting process (the process of step S1408), the reset process is performed in step S1411.

  For example, the case of performing the reset process in step S1410 after the guide sound volume setting process will be described. The reset process is executed after the sound break determination is performed in step S1503 of the guide sound volume setting process. Become. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, when the sound crack detection circuit 175 detects the occurrence of sound break, the sub MPU 142 reliably receives the sound break signal output from the sound break detection circuit 175. It becomes possible to do. As a result, the accuracy of the sound break determination can be improved.

  Even when the reset process is performed in step S1411 after the effect sound volume setting process, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  (A3) In each of the above embodiments, the reset of the hold value of the peak hold unit 182 by the reset unit 183 is performed at the same cycle as the processing cycle of the notification and effect control processing executed by the sub MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72. Although it is described, it may be performed in a cycle longer or shorter than the processing cycle of the notification and effect control processing. For example, the reset period by the reset unit 183 (oscillation circuit 217) may be set to 1 second or 1 minute. Even in this case, by setting the sound break continuation determination period for performing the determination process (steps S1507 and S1708) of whether or not the sound split continues, the sound split continues to be set. Can be determined.

  (A4) In each of the above embodiments, the comparison unit 184 compares the hold value of the sound signal with the reference level by the comparator 202, but it may be compared by an operational amplifier. Even in this case, the comparison unit 184 can detect that the hold value of the sound signal exceeds the reference level.

  (A5) In the first embodiment, the voltage value (reference level) of the reference voltage Va input to the comparator 202 is variably set by the voltage generation unit 201. However, a plurality of voltage generation units 201 are provided. May be provided, and the voltage generation unit 201 that is electrically connected to the comparator 202 may be switched by the switch unit. Even with this configuration, if the reference voltage Va generated by each voltage generation unit 201 is set to a different voltage value, the voltage value of the reference voltage Va input to the comparator 202 can be switched. As a result, the reference level input to the comparator 202 can be variably set.

  (A6) In each of the above embodiments, the LOW level signal output from the comparator 202 of the sound crack detection circuit 175 is the sound break signal, but the HI level signal may be the sound break signal. That is, the sound signal may be input to the + input terminal of the comparator 202 and the reference voltage Va (reference level) may be input to the − input terminal. In short, the sound breakage detection circuit 175 may output a sound breakup signal to the sound/light control device 72 when the occurrence of sound breakup is detected.

  (A7) In each of the above embodiments, the peak hold unit 182 sets the positive peak value of the sound signal as the hold value, but the negative peak value of the sound signal may be the hold value. For example, in the peak hold unit 182, a rectifying element such as a diode 192 is connected to the hold capacitor 191 in the reverse direction. In this configuration, the voltage generator 201 generates the negative reference voltage Va, and the comparator 202 receives the negative hold value and the negative reference voltage Va (reference level). Even in this case, the comparator 202 can detect that the absolute value of the hold value exceeds the absolute value of the reference level. That is, the sound break detection circuit 175 can detect the occurrence of sound break in the speakers 91 and 101.

  (A8) In each of the above-described embodiments, the peak hold unit 182 is provided with the buffer unit 193, but the buffer unit 193 may not be provided. That is, the operational amplifier 194 and the feedback path 195 may not be provided. Even in this case, in the first embodiment, the peak value of the sound signal can be held by the charging voltage of the hold capacitor 191 in the range where the volume level of the sound signal is higher than the forward voltage of the diode 192.

  (A9) In the first embodiment, the voltage generation unit 201 has the shunt regulator 203, but the voltage generation unit 201 may have a series regulator including a transistor. Even in this case, the reference voltage Va can be maintained at a predetermined voltage value.

  (A10) In the first embodiment, the first resistor R1 of the first resistor R1 and the second resistor R2 connected to the shunt regulator 203 is the fixed resistor, but the first resistor R1 and the second resistor R1 are fixed resistors. Both of the two resistors R2 may be fixed resistors. Even in this case, the voltage generator 201 can maintain the reference voltage Va at a predetermined voltage value.

  (A11) In the second embodiment, the voltage value of the reference voltage Va in the voltage generator 201 may be adjustable. For example, a plurality of Zener diodes 223 having different reverse voltages are arranged in parallel, and a switching unit capable of individually switching each Zener diode 223 to the conductive state or the cutoff state is provided for the comparator 202. .. With this configuration, the reverse voltage (reference voltage Va) of the Zener diode 223 input to the comparator 202 is changed by switching the Zener diode 223 that is brought into conduction with the comparator 202. That is, the reference level can be variably set.

  (A12) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the sound break-up detection circuit 175 detects the sound break-up, as a process for reducing the sound volume level of the sound signal, a sound volume limiting process for decreasing the amplification factor of the amplifier 171. Is performed by the sub MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72. As processing for reducing the volume level of the sound signal, notification processing for notifying that sound cracking has occurred and output of the sound signal from the amplifier 171 are performed. May be performed, a process of outputting a signal indicating the occurrence of sound cracking to the management computer, a process of stopping the emission of the game ball from the game ball firing mechanism 51, and the like.

  For example, the notification sound for notifying that the sound is broken is output from the speakers 91 and 101. In this case, the hall manager can know from the alarm sound that sound cracks have occurred in the speakers 91 and 101, and thereby the sound cracks such as reducing the volume of the pachinko machine 10 that is the alarm source. It is possible to perform work to resolve It is highly likely that the player will endure playing the game without notifying the hall manager even if sound cracking occurs, so notifying sound cracking is effective in eliminating sound cracking. Target.

  (A13) In each of the above embodiments, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 can be reduced in a plurality of steps, but the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 can be reduced by one step. For example, when it is determined in steps S1501 and S1701 that the volume of the speakers 91 and 101 is limited, the volume limiting process is not executed. However, in this configuration, the amount of decrease in the amplification factor is insufficient even if the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is reduced by one step, and the volume level of the sound signal is not below the reference level (the sound crack is eliminated. Is a concern. Therefore, it is preferable to set the reduction rate of the amplification factor to a sufficiently large value. By the way, the reduction rate of the amplification factor may be set so that the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 becomes 0%.

  (A14) In each of the above embodiments, when the sound breakage detection circuit 175 detects the sound breakup, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is reduced by one step. However, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is collectively set to a plurality of steps. May be reduced. That is, the amplification factor may be reduced by a plurality of steps in one volume limitation process (the processes of steps S1508 and S1710). For example, when one of the speakers 91 and 101 has a sound crack, the amplification factor is reduced by one step in one volume limiting process, and the sound crack occurs. When there are a plurality of speakers, the amplification factor is reduced by a plurality of steps in one volume limitation process. Further, when the amplification factor is reduced stepwise, the reduction rate of the amplification factor at each stage may not be the same.

  (A15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the amplification rate of the amplifier 171 is reduced by a predetermined rate with respect to the rated output of the power section 173 in the volume limit processing. However, the amplification rate set at each time is set. However, it may be configured to be reduced by a predetermined ratio. Further, the peak value of the volume level of the sound signal may be reduced by a predetermined value (for example, several dB).

  (A16) In each of the above-described embodiments, even if a sound crack is detected by the sound break detection circuit 175, the duration of the sound break does not exceed the sound break continuation determination period (NO in steps S1507 and S1708). In the case), the volume limitation process is not performed, but if a sound break is detected, the volume limit process may be performed even if the sound break does not continue. According to this configuration, when a sound break occurs, the sound break can be promptly eliminated.

  Also, in the configuration where the volume is limited even if the sound break does not continue, if the sound break is detected even after the amplification factor is reduced, the waiting period is set until the next reduction in the amplification factor. Will not be secured. Even in this case, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is gradually reduced.

  By the way, even if the waiting period is secured after the volume limiting process is executed and before the next volume limiting process is executed, the waiting period may not be used as the sound crack continuation determination period. That is, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the duration of sound break exceeds the sound break continuation determination period.

  Even when the standby period is used as the sound crack continuation determination period, the standby period and the sound crack continuation determination period may be set to different lengths. For example, the standby period is set to be longer than the sound break continuation determination period.

  (A17) In each of the above-described embodiments, the condition for performing the sound volume limiting process includes that sound cracking continues beyond the sound crack continuation determination period (when YES is determined in steps S1507 and S1708). However, it may include that the sound breakage detection circuit 175 detects sound breaks a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more during the sound break continuation determination period. That is, the sound volume limiting process may be executed when the sound breakage occurs intermittently.

  (B1) In each of the above embodiments, the upper speaker 91 is provided in the front door frame 14, and the lower speaker 101 is provided in the outer frame 11, but at least one speaker serves as sound output means. Should be provided in. Even in this case, it is possible to realize the configuration in which the speaker as the sound output means is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine and the common ROM 147 as the storage means for storing the sound data is provided in the inner frame 13 as the gaming machine main body. The position where the sound output means is provided may be set arbitrarily, and may be the central portion of the front door frame 14 or the like.

  Further, in the configuration in which at least one sound output means is provided in the front door frame 14, it is preferable that at least one sound output means is provided in the outer frame 11. With this, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the sound output means is provided in the gaming machine front body and the outer frame, and the storage means is provided in the gaming machine main body.

  (B2) In each of the above-described embodiments, the sound/light control device 72 having the common ROM 147 as the storage means is provided in the inner frame 13, but the sound/light control device 72 is provided in the back pack unit 15. Good. In this case, if the back pack unit 15 and the inner frame 13 are included in the gaming machine body, the common ROM 147 is provided in the gaming machine body. Further, the common ROM 147 may be provided in the main control device 71, the payout control device 78, the power supply and firing control device 79, the display control device 128, etc., instead of the sound and light control device 72. In either case, the storage means is provided in the gaming machine body.

  Similar to the common ROM 147, the amplifier 171 as the amplifying means and the sound crack detecting circuit 175 as the level excess detecting means are not the sound and light control device 72 but the main control device 71, the payout control device 78, the power supply and the firing control. It may be provided in the device 79, the display control device 128, or the like. In either case, the amplification means and the level excess detection means are provided in the gaming machine body. Further, the installation target of the amplification means and the level excess detection means may be different from the installation target of the storage means.

  (B3) In each of the above-described embodiments, the sound data is stored in the common ROM 147 in the sound/light control device 72, but the sound data may be directly stored in the ROM 144. Further, the sound data may be stored in the ROM 123 of the main controller 71.

  (B4) In each of the above embodiments, the operation knob 112 is arranged at a position that does not overlap the switch opening 113 of the back pack unit 15, but the operation knob 112 is arranged at a position that overlaps the switch opening 113. It may have been done. In this case, the hall manager does not have to rotate the back pack unit 15 with respect to the inner frame 13 to open the switch cover 114, and the operation knob 112 is moved to the back side of the pachinko machine. Can be exposed to. For this reason, the preparation work when operating the operation knob 112 can be facilitated.

  The back pack unit 15 may not be provided with the switch opening 113. In this case, it is necessary to open the back pack unit 15 with respect to the inner frame 13 in order to operate both the volume switch 111 and the operation knob 112.

  (B5) In each of the above-described embodiments, the operation knob 112 capable of changing the reference level of the sound crack detection circuit 175 is provided on the back side of the inner frame 13, but the operation knob 112 is on the front side of the inner frame 13. May be provided in the back pack unit 15 or the front door frame 14. Further, the operation knob 112 may be provided in the main control device 71, the payout control device 78, the power supply and firing control device 79, the display control device 128, etc., instead of the sound and light control device 72. In any case, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the hall manager can operate the operation knob 112. If the operation knob 112 is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, not only the hall manager but also the player can operate the operation knob 112.

  (B6) When the volume limitation is performed for the purpose of eliminating the sound cracking in the speakers 91 and 101, the volume limitation may be continued until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. It may be continued for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) regardless of the type of output sound or the game state. In any case, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the volume limitation is canceled at a predetermined timing.

  (B7) In each of the above-described embodiments, even if the sound volume is limited for the purpose of eliminating the sound crack, it is determined whether or not the sound crack is occurring in the speakers 91 and 101 (steps S1503 and S1703). Processing) is performed, but the sound breakage determination may not be performed when the volume is limited. Further, when the sound volume is restricted, even if sound cracking occurs, a sound cracking signal may not be input from the sound cracking detection circuit 175 to the sub MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72.

  (B8) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the sound break is generated in the guide sound output from the speakers 91 and 101, the volume limit is always performed for the purpose of eliminating the sound break. The volume may be limited according to the contents of the above, or the volume may not be limited for the guide sound. With the configuration in which the volume is not limited, the guide sound can be output at a high volume even if the sound is broken, which makes it easier for the player or the hall manager to recognize that the guide sound is being output. ..

  (B9) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the volume limitation is performed for the purpose of eliminating the sound distortion of the effect sound, the volume limitation is canceled at the timing when the variable display ends. If the restriction is being performed in the normal game state or the special game state instead of the variable display, the volume restriction may be released at the timing when the normal game state or the special game state ends.

  (C1) The plurality of sound output means such as the speakers 91 and 101 may be provided in any part of the pachinko machine 10. For example, all the speakers 91, 101 may be provided in the front door frame 14, or the speakers 91, 101 may be provided in the outer frame 11, the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14, respectively.

  (C2) In the above embodiments, the speakers 91 and 101 are individually connected to the amplifier 171 via the speaker paths 135, but the speakers 91 and 101 are one speaker that is branched into a plurality of speakers. They may be collectively connected to the amplifier 171 by the path 135. In this case, the sound signals output from the amplifier 171 are collectively input to the speakers 91 and 101. However, even in this case, if the allowable input levels of the speakers 91 and 101 are different from each other due to tolerances or the like, sound cracks occur even if the volume levels of the sound signals input to the speakers 91 and 101 are the same. A speaker and a speaker that does not occur are mixed. Therefore, it is preferable that the sound breakage detection circuit 175 detects the occurrence of sound breakup in each speaker 91, 101 in order to eliminate the sound breakup in each speaker 91, 101.

  (C3) In each of the above embodiments, the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 can be set individually for each speaker 91, 101, but the amplification factor of the amplifier 171 is summarized for each speaker 91, 101. The configuration may be set as follows. Even in this case, when sound cracking occurs in at least one of the speakers 91 and 101, the amplification factor is reduced for all the speakers 91 and 101, so that the sound cracking occurs in the speaker in which sound breaking occurs. Can be eliminated.

  (C4) In each of the above embodiments, the sound breakage detection circuit 175 is provided individually for each of the speakers 91, 101, but the sound breakup detection circuit 175 is provided for each of the speakers 91, 101. Only one may be provided. For example, each branch path 176 branched from each speaker path 135 is collectively connected to one sound break detection circuit 175. Even with this configuration, it is possible to detect that the sound break has occurred in at least one of the speakers 91 and 101 by the sound break detection circuit 175.

  (C5) In each of the above-described embodiments, the reference level can be variably set in each sound breakage detection circuit 175, but the reference level may be a fixed value. Further, the reference level may be set to the same value in all the sound breakage detection circuits 175. In this case, even if the allowable input levels of the speakers 91 and 101 are different from each other due to intersections or the like, if the reference level is set in accordance with the allowable input level, sound breakup occurs in the speakers 91 and 101. , Or that the sound volume level of the sound signal is close to the allowable input level can be detected by the sound breakage detection circuit 175.

  (C6) In each of the above-described embodiments, when sound breakage occurs in any of the speakers 91 and 101, as a process for reducing the volume level of the sound signal for the speaker, the amplifier 171 performs the processing. The volume limiting process for reducing the amplification factor is performed by the sub-MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72. As a process for reducing the volume level of the sound signal, sound cracking occurs in either of the speakers 91, 101. It may be possible to perform an informing process of informing whether or not there is a sound, a process of stopping the output of the sound from the speaker in which the sound is broken, and the like.

  (C7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the ratio of the number of steps for lowering the amplification factor for the speaker in which sound cracking occurs and the number of steps for lowering the amplification factor for the speaker in which no sound cracking occurs is 1:2. Although it was set to 1:4, this ratio may be set arbitrarily. However, it is preferable that the number of steps for reducing the amplification factor of the speaker in which the sound crack has not occurred is smaller than the number of steps for reducing the amplification factor of the speaker in which the sound crack has occurred. Further, the volume limitation for the speaker in which the sound crack has not occurred may be performed in the same manner as the volume limitation for the speaker in which the sound crack occurs, described in (a12) to (a14).

  (C8) In each of the above-described embodiments, in a state where sound cracking occurs in any of the speakers 91 and 101, both the upper speaker 91 and the lower speaker 101 are installed in the speaker in which sound breaking does not occur. When it is included (when the volume harmony processing is performed in step S1715), the upper speaker 91 may increase the output volume reduction range of the speakers 91 and 101 more than the lower speaker 101. However, the lower speaker 101 may have a larger reduction range of the output volume than the upper speaker 91. Further, the upper speaker 91 and the lower speaker 101 may always have the same output volume reduction range.

  Further, instead of grouping (grouping) each upper speaker 91 into one group (group) and each lower speaker 101 one group, for example, the right speakers 91, 101 are one group, the left speaker 91. , 101 may be grouped into one group, and the right speaker and the left speaker, in which sound cracking does not occur, have different output volume reduction widths. Further, instead of grouping the speakers 91 and 101 according to the arrangement, the speakers 91 and 101 may be grouped according to the type of output sound or the pitch (frequency band) of the sound.

  (C9) In the above embodiments, the volume harmony process (the process of step S1715) is executed when the output sound from the speakers 91 and 101 is the effect sound. It may be executed when the sound is a notification sound such as an illegal sound or a guide sound. For example, when the output sound is a guide sound, if sound cracking is occurring in at least one of the speakers 91 and 101, the speaker in which the sound breaking is occurring is specified, and the specified speaker is targeted. The volume is limited, and the volume is limited even for the speaker in which no sound crack occurs according to the number of stages of the volume limitation.

  (C10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the upper speaker 91 outputs middle and high tones, and the lower speaker 101 outputs bass. However, the upper speaker 91 outputs bass and the lower speaker 101 outputs middle. It may be configured to output a high tone. In addition, both the upper and lower speakers 91 and 101 may be configured to output both middle and high tones and low tones.

  (D1) In each of the above embodiments, the volume switch 111 is exposed to the rear of the gaming machine through the switch opening 113 provided in the back pack unit 15, but the switch opening 113 is provided. You don't have to. Even in this case, by rotating the back pack unit 15 with respect to the inner frame 13, it becomes possible to expose and operate the volume switch 111 toward the rear of the gaming machine.

  Although the volume switch 111 is provided on the back side of the inner frame 13, it may be provided on the front side of the inner frame 13 or may be provided on the back pack unit 15 or the inner frame 13. Further, the volume switch 111 may be provided in the main control device 71, the payout control device 78, the power supply and firing control device 79, the display control device 128, etc., instead of the sound/light control device 72. In any case, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the hall manager can operate the volume switch 111. Further, if the volume switch 111 is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, not only the hall manager but also the player can operate the volume switch 111.

  (D2) In each of the above-described embodiments, the volume switch 111 has a selection function of selecting whether or not to limit the volume for the purpose of eliminating sound cracks, and the volume output from the speakers 91 and 101 is set by the hall manager or the like. Has both a sound volume adjusting function for adjusting, but a dedicated switch having these functions individually may be provided. For example, the volume switch 111 has a volume adjustment function, and another dedicated switch has a selection function for eliminating sound cracks.

  In this configuration, the dedicated switch can be switched to a plurality of states, and the position of the dedicated switch includes the scale F. In this case, even if the position of the dedicated switch is on the scale F, the position of the volume switch 111 can be switched to any of the scales 0-5. In other words, even if the dedicated switch is set to the mode that eliminates the sound crack generated in the output sound, the output volume in that mode can be variably set by the volume switch 111.

  Further, the dedicated switch may be provided on the front surface of the gaming machine so that the player can operate it. For example, a push-button type dedicated switch is provided around the lower plate 62a. With this configuration, each time the dedicated switch is pressed, it is switched to a mode that eliminates sound cracking and a mode that does not eliminate sound cracking, and in the mode that cancels sound cracking, you must win the lottery for sound cracking effect. As a result, when a sound break occurs in the speakers 91 and 101, a sound break effect can be executed.

  (D3) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the sound output from the speakers 91 and 101 is a fraudulently generated sound, whether the sound crack detection signal is output from the sound crack detection circuit 175 in the sound volume setting process of the sub MPU 142. Although the sound cracking determination (the processing of steps S1503 and S1703) for determining whether or not it is not performed, the sound cracking determination may be performed even if the output sound is an improperly generated sound. Further, the output sound may be a production sound, and the sound break determination may be performed when the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F.

  (D4) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F and the sound output from the speakers 91 and 101 is a fraudulent sound, a sound crack is generated in the fraudulent sound. However, although the sound volume is not limited for the purpose of eliminating the sound cracking, the output sound for which the sound volume is not limited regardless of the position of the volume switch 111 may be a production sound or a guide sound. In this case, with respect to the effect sound and the guide sound, maintaining the volume is prioritized over eliminating the sound cracking, and by reducing the volume, the effect effect and the guide effect peculiar to the effect sound and the guide sound can be obtained. On the contrary, it is possible to suppress the situation in which it is lowered.

  (D5) In each of the above embodiments, even when the position of the volume switch 111 is not on the scale F, if the guide sounds output from the speakers 91 and 101 have sound cracks, the purpose is to eliminate the sound cracks. Although the volume is limited, the output sound whose volume is limited irrespective of the position of the volume switch 111 may be a fraudulent sound or an effect sound. In this case, regarding fraudulent sound and effect sound, it is prioritized to eliminate sound cracking rather than maintaining the volume, and by maintaining the volume, fraudulent sound effect and effect peculiar to fraudulent sound or effect sound It is possible to suppress the situation where the effect is rather lowered.

  (D6) In each of the above-described embodiments, the amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplifier 171 when the illegally generated sound is output from the speakers 91 and 101 is always set to the maximum value (rated output of the amplifier 171). The amplification factor in this case may be set to a value according to the position of the volume switch 111. In this configuration, the fraudulent sound is output at the volume corresponding to the position of the volume switch 111.

  (D7) In each of the above embodiments, when the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F, and the sound output from the speakers 91 and 101 is not cracked, the amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplifier 171 is increased. Although it is always set to the maximum value, the amplification factor in this case may be set to a value smaller than the maximum value. Note that the amplification factor in this case may be selected by a dedicated operation switch different from the volume switch 111.

  (D8) In each of the above embodiments, the sound for notifying the payout abnormality acquired by the payout control device 78 is the guide sound output from the speakers 91 and 101. The sound for notifying the abnormality regarding the launch of the game ball acquired at 79 may be a guide sound. In short, the guide sound may be a sound for notifying an abnormality that has occurred in the pachinko machine 10.

  (D9) Examples of the fraudulent sound output from the speakers 91 and 101 include a sound that informs that the front door frame 14 has been fraudulently opened and a sound that the locking device 16 has been fraudulently unlocked. Can be mentioned. The point is that the sound for notifying the pachinko machine 10 that a fraud has been made may be the fraud sound.

  (D10) In the above embodiments, when one of the effect sound and the notification sound is output from the speakers 91 and 101, the other is not output, but the effect sound and the notification sound are output at the same time. It may be configured to. For example, when the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F and the output sounds from the speakers 91 and 101 include the fraudulent sound as the notification sound and the effect sound, a sound crack occurs in the output sound. Even so, the volume is not limited. In this case, the priority is to maintain the volume of the fraudulent sound, rather than to eliminate the sound cracking of the effect sound.

  (D11) In each of the above embodiments, the volume setting process for setting the output volume from the speakers 91, 101 is executed by the sound/light control device 72, but the volume setting process is performed by the main control device 71 and the display. It may be executed by the controller 128. Even in this case, it is possible to preferably eliminate the sound crack generated in the output sound. Further, in this case, it is preferable that the amplifier 171 and the sound breakage detection circuit 175 be mounted on a control device that executes a volume setting process.

  (E1) In each of the above embodiments, when the position of the volume switch 111 is on the scale F, the sound cracking effect can be executed. However, the sound cracking effect may be executed regardless of the position of the volume switch 111. ..

  (E2) In each of the above-described embodiments, the sound cracking effect can be executed when the variation display mode on the symbol display device 41 is one of the super reach A to C. However, one of the normal reach A and B is executed. If it is, or if it is completely off, the sound cracking effect may be executable. In any case, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of the stop result of the variable display.

  (E3) In each of the above embodiments, when the game is being played, that is, when the variable display of the symbols is being displayed on the symbol display device 41, the sound cracking effect can be executed. The sound cracking effect may be executable when the variable display is not displayed. For example, the sound cracking effect may be executable when the pachinko machine 10 is in the open/close execution mode (special game state) or when the win/loss lottery mode is in the high probability mode. In either case, the state in which the player is more likely to be given the privilege and the state in which the player is not likely to be provided with the privilege are differentiated by the sound cracking effect, so that the expectation for the privilege granting can be increased by the sound cracking effect.

  (E4) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the sound cracking effect is performed, the length of the effect sound cracking period in which the sound volume is not limited is the same as that of the sound effect limiting period in which the sound volume is limited. However, the lengths of these periods may be different. Also, when sound cracking occurs in the effect sound, the sound cracking effect is defined by repeatedly performing and canceling the volume limitation.However, the effect sound cracking period is set to be approximately the same length as the variable display period. The sound break effect may be set and continuously generated until the variable display ends. Further, the sound cracking effect may have a volume limitation mode, and the degree of expectation for the stop result of the variable display may be different depending on which mode of the sound cracking effect is executed.

  (E5) In each of the above-described embodiments, the total of the production sound cracking period and the production limitation period is set to be smaller than 1/2 of the required period required for one variable display. The total of the effect production time limit and the production time limit may be set arbitrarily, and may be smaller than 1/4 of the required time period.

  (E6) In the third embodiment, when the sound volume is limited for the purpose of eliminating sound cracks in the effect sound, the volume limitation can be released in a plurality of steps. The cancellation of the above-mentioned may be applied in the case where the volume is limited for the purpose of eliminating the sound crack of the notification sound such as the guide sound. As a result, when the volume limit for the notification sound is released, it is less likely to cause a sense of discomfort with respect to the change in the volume of the notification sound.

  (F1) In each of the above embodiments, in the configuration in which the amplifier 171 and the speakers 91 and 101 are connected by the speaker path 135, the sound breakage detection circuit 175 is connected to the branch path 176 branched from the speaker path 135. The sound breakage detection circuit 175 may be connected to the amplifier 171 via another path independent of the speaker path 135.

  In this case, the timing at which the sound signal is output from the amplifier 171 to the speakers 91 and 101 and the timing at which the sound signal is output to the sound breakage detection circuit 175 can be made different. For example, a predetermined time lag is secured from the output of the sound signal to the sound break detection circuit 175 to the output of the sound signal to the speakers 91 and 101. In this configuration, when the sound crack detection circuit 175 detects that the volume level of the sound signal exceeds the reference level, the amplification rate of the sound signal in the amplifier 171 is limited, and the limited sound signal is limited. Can be output to the speakers 91 and 101. As a result, unlike the configuration in which the sound signal is output to the sound crack detection circuit 175 and the speakers 91 and 101 at the same time, the speakers 91 and 101 are detected at the same time when the sound break detection circuit 175 detects the sound crack occurrence. It is possible to avoid a situation in which sound cracking occurs.

  (F2) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a plurality of sound output means such as the speakers 91, 101, but only one sound output means may be provided. Further, the sound output means may be a headphone speaker worn on the head of a person. Further, the sound output means may be an output terminal that outputs a sound signal to a speaker such as a headphone speaker externally attached to the pachinko machine 10. In short, the sound output means may be any means for outputting sound at a volume according to the volume level of the sound signal.

  (F3) In the above embodiment, in the lower speaker section 100, the speaker housing 102 is a closed enclosure, but it may be a bass reflex enclosure. For example, a bass reflex port is formed in the speaker housing 102 separately from the speaker opening 105. In this configuration, in the internal space of the speaker housing 102, the lower speaker 101 is arranged at a position where its sound output portion is separated from the speaker opening 105. In this case, the sound output from the lower speaker 101 is propagated through the internal space of the speaker housing 102 from the speaker opening 105 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  (F4) A common memory that stores data in advance is used between the control unit that executes sound output control using sound data and the control unit that executes image display control using image data. It may be configured to be. For example, a common ROM may be used between the sound output LSI 146 and the VDP 163 provided as a drawing LSI. In the present configuration, the ROM connected to the sound output LSI 146 may have a configuration in which at least a part of the image data is stored together with the sound data. Instead, the ROM connected to the VDP 163 may store the sound together with the image data. At least a part of the data may be stored. In this case, the sound output LSI 146 and the VDP 163 may be directly connected without the intervening MPUs 142 and 162, or may be connected through the subordinate MPUs 142 and 162.

  (F5) The common ROM 147 is directly connected to the sound output LSI 146 and is not directly connected to the sub MPU 142. However, instead of this, it is common to the bus connecting the sound output LSI 146 and the sub MPU 142. The ROM 147 for use may be connected. In this case, it is preferable to separately provide a circuit for adjusting the access timing of the sound output LSI 146 and the sub MPU 142 so that the common ROM 147 is not simultaneously accessed.

  (F6) The sound source method in the sound output LSI 146 is not limited to that in the above embodiment, and for example, the waveform memory method, FM method, AM method, or the like may be adopted.

  (F7) The configuration in which the sub MPU 142 accesses the register 152 of the sound output LSI 146 using the bus B1 is not limited to the configuration of the above embodiment. For example, no matter which area of the register 152 is accessed, information may be transmitted in parallel by using all the signal paths J1 to J8 of the bus B1.

  (F8) The sound data read from the common ROM 147 may be transferred to the sound data processing unit 153 instead of being transferred to the register 152. In this case, the timing is set so that the period during which the sound data is transferred from the common ROM 147 toward the sound output LSI 146 and the period during which the light emission data is transferred from the common ROM 147 toward the sound output LSI 146 do not overlap. It may be adjusted. The period during which the light emission data is transferred from the sound output LSI 146 to the sub MPU 142 may overlap with the period during which the sound data is transferred from the common ROM 147.

  Further, in addition to the above configuration, the data after analyzing the sequence data and the parameter data is not stored in the register 152 but is stored in the sound data processing unit 153, and an instruction from the sound data processing unit 153 is given. The data transfer unit 155 may be configured to transfer the sound data based on this.

  (F9) Hold information related to winning in the upper working opening 33 and hold information related to winning in the lower working opening 34 are stored separately, and the hold information related to winning in the lower working opening 34 is given priority. A configuration in which the digestion is exhausted may be applied, or conversely, a configuration in which the reservation information related to winning in the upper operation opening 33 is preferentially digested may be applied.

  Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operating ports are not arranged side by side in the vertical direction, but the first operating port corresponding to the upper operating port 33 and the second operating port corresponding to the lower operating port 34 are provided on the left and right. The structure may be arranged in parallel, or both of these working ports may be arranged obliquely in parallel. Furthermore, depending on the operation mode of the firing handle 55, both operation ports may be arranged apart from each other so that only the first operation port or the second operation port can be aimed at.

  Further, in the above-mentioned configuration, the main display section 43 displays the first display area for displaying the result of the judgment on whether or not the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper working opening 33, and the winning of the lower working opening 34. It is also possible to provide a second display area for displaying the result of the determination of whether or not the held information is held. In this case, the variable information of the pattern is displayed in the first display area based on the holding information acquired based on the winning of the winning on the upper operation opening 33 before being the object of the winning/failing judgment or the object of the winning/failing judgment. Is started and the stop result corresponding to the win/fail judgment is displayed, and the variation display for one game is ended. Further, based on the fact that the hold information obtained based on the winning of the lower working opening 34 becomes the object of the hit determination or the object of the hit determination, the variable display of the pattern is displayed in the second display area. At the same time as the start, the result of stop corresponding to the win/no judgment is displayed, and the variation display of the one game is ended.

  (F10) Depending on whether the hold information related to winning in the upper working opening 33 is the target of the winning/disabling judgment, or the holding information related to winning in the lower working opening 34 is the target of the winning/failing judgment. The profits obtained may be different. In addition, in the configuration in which a plurality of operating ports are provided, the number of operating ports is not limited to two and may be three or more. Further, the configuration may be such that only one operating port is provided.

  (F11) Display control based on a command output from the main control device 71 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 128 is controlled by the sound and light control device 72 based on the command output from the main control device 71. The device 128 may control the sound/light control device 72. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound/light control device 72 and the display control device 128 are separately provided, both control devices may be provided as one control device, and the function of one of the both control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 71, and both functions of the both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 71. The configuration of the command output from the main control device 71 to the sound/light control device 72 and the configuration of the command output from the sound/light control device 72 to the display control device 128 are also arbitrary.

  (F12) The device for executing the game-use effect is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and the structure for executing the game-use effect is executed by the operation of the movable decorative member. Alternatively, the game light effect may be executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, or the game time effect may be executed by a combination of all or some of the above-described aspects. Good.

  (F13) In each of the above-described embodiments, one game time is started on the main display unit 43 based on the fact that the main controller 71 makes a win/fail judgment, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, based on the fact that the game times are started at a timing before the timing at which the win/loss determination is actually performed when the conditions for making the win/fail determination in the main control device 71 are satisfied, and then the win/no determination is performed. The display mode, the display continuation time, and the stop result after that in the game time may be determined. In this case, in the main control device 71, when it is the start timing of the game time, first, the variation command is transmitted, and after that, when the hit determination, the display continuation time determination and the type determination are performed, the time command and the type The command may be transmitted, or the transmission timings of the time command and the type command may be shifted.

  (F14) In each of the above embodiments, the stop result corresponding to each game result is displayed on the main display section 43, but instead of this, the main display section 43 may be omitted, and A common stop result may be displayed on the main display unit 43 even if it is a game result, and the stop result is randomly displayed on the main display unit 43, so that the main display unit 43 is displayed as a result. May be configured so that it cannot be identified which game result.

  (F15) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a special area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated when a ball enters and a big hit, a pachinko machine provided with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball.

  Further, a non-ball-ball type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of kinds of symbols in the circumferential direction is provided, the reel is started to rotate by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels stop after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the game machine main body that is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage unit and a loading device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, in which the reel starts to rotate.

<Regarding invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. It should be noted that, in the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above-described embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, etc., but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses, etc.

<Feature A group>
The invention of the following characteristic group A is effective for the following problems.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a speaker as a sound output means, and the speaker outputs various effect sounds according to the gaming state, so that the degree of attention to the game can be increased. Further, since the output sound from the speaker is used as the notification sound, it becomes possible to notify the state of the gaming machine and the occurrence of fraud.

  The speaker outputs a sound when the sound signal is input from the amplifier, and the volume of the sound output from the speaker is determined by setting the amplification rate of the sound signal by the amplifier. In the gaming machine in which the amplification factor of the amplifier is variably set, it is possible to change the output volume from the speaker according to the amplification factor of the amplifier. For example, in a gaming machine provided with a volume switch, the amplification factor of the amplifier is changed by operating the volume switch, and thereby the output volume from the speaker is changed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-242242). See Japanese Patent Publication No. 2005-261808).

  However, when the volume level of the sound signal input to the speaker is higher than the allowable input level of the speaker, the sound output from the speaker may sound distorted due to distortion of the waveform of the sound signal. In this case, the output sound, which should improve the game playability and convenience, gives the player discomfort.

  On the other hand, when the volume switch is operated so that the amplification factor of the amplifier is reduced, the volume level of the sound signal input to the speaker is reduced, and the sound crack generated in the speaker can be eliminated. It will be possible.

  However, when a hall manager, a player, or the like operates the volume switch, the operation mode is not always the mode suitable for sound cracking each time. For example, in the configuration in which the volume switch is arranged on the back side of the game machine, the amplifier is operated to the extent that the hall manager does not crack the sound outside the business hours of the game hall (for example, before opening the store, after closing the store, and on regular holidays). It is assumed that the volume switch is operated so that the amplification factor of is reduced, but this does not eliminate the sound crack at the timing when the sound crack actually occurs. Also, with the configuration in which the volume switch is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, the player can operate the volume switch during the game, but it is not possible to operate the volume switch each time a sound crack occurs. The volume switch is operated more frequently, which is not realistic for the player.

Features A1. Amplification means (amplifier 171) for amplifying the sound signal,
Sound output means (upper speaker 91, lower speaker 101) for outputting sound at a volume corresponding to the volume level of the sound signal by inputting the sound signal amplified by the amplifying means,
Equipped with
The amplification means and the sound output means are electrically connected by a sound output path (speaker path 135), and the sound signal amplified by the amplification means is input to the sound output means through the sound output path. Is a gaming machine
The sound signal amplified by the amplifying means is input to the amplifying means by a branch path (branch path 176) branched from the sound output path, and the sound volume level of the sound signal is predetermined. The game machine is provided with an over-level detection circuit (sound crack detection circuit 175) for detecting that the reference level is exceeded.

  According to the characteristic A1, the level excess detection circuit detects that the volume level of the sound signal input to the sound output means exceeds the reference level. Therefore, if the reference level is set as the allowable input level of the sound output means. It is possible to detect that a sound break has occurred when the volume level of the sound signal exceeds the allowable input level of the sound output means. In this case, the amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplifying means is reduced in accordance with the timing when the sound crack occurs, whereby the sound crack in the sound output means can be preferably eliminated.

  Here, for example, when the sound output means and the level excess detection circuit are respectively connected to the amplification means through independent paths, the sound signal input to the sound output means and the sound signal input to the level excess detection circuit And the volume level may be different. In this case, the accuracy of sound crack detection by the level excess detection circuit becomes low.

  On the other hand, since the level excess detection circuit is connected to the branch path from the sound output path to which the sound output means is connected, the sound signal amplified by the amplification means is output to the sound output means and the level excess detection circuit. Will be input to both. In this case, the over-level detection circuit detects the sound cracks targeting the sound signal actually input to the sound output means, so that the detection accuracy of the sound break occurrence by the over-level detection circuit can be improved. As a result, the level-excessive detection circuit may erroneously detect the occurrence of sound cracks even though the sound output means does not have sound cracks. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of sound cracks from being detected by the detection circuit.

  As described above, it is possible to preferably prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the occurrence of sound cracks in the sound output means.

Feature A2. The level excess detection circuit is
Comprising comparison means (comparator 202) for comparing the volume level of the sound signal input from the amplification means with the reference level, wherein the comparison means compares the volume level of the sound signal with the reference level. And detecting that the volume level of the sound signal exceeds the reference level,
The game machine according to feature A1, wherein the comparison means does not have a phase compensation capacitor.

  According to the characteristic A2, since the comparison means for comparing the volume level of the sound signal and the reference level does not have the phase compensation capacitor (for example, because it is a comparator), the comparison means has the phase compensation capacitor, for example. Compared with the configuration (for example, operational amplifier), it is possible to improve the responsiveness in the case of detecting the sound crack by the level excess detection circuit. Therefore, in the configuration in which the over-level detection circuit and the sound output means are connected in parallel to the amplification means, the over-level detection circuit detects the sound crack with respect to the timing when the sound output means causes the sound crack. It is possible to prevent the timing from being delayed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the accuracy with which the over-level detection circuit detects the occurrence of sound breakage.

Features A3. The level excess detection circuit is
A voltage generation unit (voltage generation unit 201) that generates a reference voltage (reference voltage Va) whose voltage value is the reference level;
The comparison means has a terminal (−input terminal) to which the sound signal is input from the amplification means, and a terminal (+input terminal) to which the reference voltage generated by the voltage generation unit is input, Comparing the sound signal and the reference voltage,
The game machine according to feature A2, wherein the voltage generator holds the voltage value of the reference voltage at a predetermined value.

  According to the characteristic A3, in the configuration in which the volume level of the sound signal and the reference level are compared by the comparison means, the voltage value of the reference voltage input to the comparison means is held at a predetermined value as the reference level, so that the sound signal It is possible to prevent the reference level, which is the comparison target of the sound volume levels of, from increasing or decreasing due to the fluctuation of the power supply voltage. This makes it possible to fix the reference voltage input as the reference level to the comparison means to a predetermined value in accordance with the allowable input level of the sound output means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detection accuracy of the occurrence of sound breakage by the level excess detection circuit from being lowered by the fluctuation of the power supply voltage.

Features A4. The level excess detection circuit is
It has a peak holding unit (peak holding unit 182) for holding the peak value of the volume level of the sound signal as a hold value,
The game machine according to feature A2 or A3, wherein the comparison means compares the hold value held by the peak holding means with the reference level.

  Since the sound signal is vibrating, the volume level of the sound signal is sampled at a predetermined timing, and in the configuration in which the sampling value and the reference level are compared by the comparison means, the sampling value is the peak value of the volume level. Not necessarily. Therefore, although the peak value of the sound volume level exceeds the reference level, the sampling value does not exceed the reference level, and therefore the occurrence of sound crack cannot be detected by the level excess detection circuit. There is a risk.

  On the other hand, according to the characteristic A4, since the peak value of the volume level of the sound signal is set as the hold value in the peak holding unit, the peak value of the sound signal and the reference level can be compared by the comparison unit. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the sound crack generation which cannot be detected by the level excess detection circuit even though the peak value of the sound signal is larger than the reference level.

Features A5. The peak holding means is
A hold capacitor (hold capacitor 191) that is charged by the sound signal input from the amplifying means, and a rectifying element (diode 192) that restricts reverse flow of current from the hold capacitor toward the amplifying means. The gaming machine according to feature A4, which has and holds the charging voltage of the hold capacitor as the peak value.

  According to the characteristic A5, in the configuration in which the charge voltage of the hold capacitor is held as the peak value of the sound signal, the discharge from the hold capacitor to the amplification means is regulated by the rectifying element, so that the charge voltage of the hold capacitor is natural. It is possible to suppress deterioration due to discharge. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an error between the hold value held by the peak holding means and the peak value of the actual sound signal.

Features A6. The peak holding means is
It has a buffer section (buffer section 193) formed by connecting the output terminal of the operational amplifier (opamp 194) and the inverting input terminal (-input terminal) by the feedback path (feedback path 195),
The hold capacitor is connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier and the feedback path,
The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the rectifying element is a diode having a forward voltage and is arranged between the output terminal of the operational amplifier and the hold capacitor in the buffer section.

  In the configuration in which the discharge from the hold capacitor to the amplifying means is regulated by the diode, when the voltage applied to the diode by the sound signal is smaller than the forward voltage, the current does not flow in the diode even in the forward direction. .. Therefore, when the volume level of the sound signal is smaller than the forward voltage of the diode, the hold capacitor is not charged by the sound signal, and the peak holding unit cannot hold the peak value of the sound signal as the hold value. .. That is, it is not possible to detect the occurrence of sound cracks by the level excess detection circuit.

  On the other hand, according to the characteristic A6, the diode is incorporated in the buffer section. In this case, since the inverting input terminal and the non-inverting input terminal of the operational amplifier are in a virtual short circuit state, even if the volume level of the sound signal is lower than the forward voltage of the diode, the hold capacitor is charged by the sound signal and the peak is maintained. The means can hold the peak value of the sound signal as a hold value. In other words, it is possible to detect the occurrence of sound breakup by the level excess detection circuit.

Features A7. The level excess detection circuit is
Characteristic A4 characterized by including reset means (reset unit 183) for clearing the hold value of the peak holding means and holding the new peak value of the sound signal as a hold value in the peak holding means. A gaming machine described in any one of A to A6.

  According to the characteristic A7, since the peak holding means is initialized by the resetting means, the peak holding means can hold the maximum value of the volume level of the sound signal as the peak value every predetermined period. That is, it is possible to repeatedly output the peak value of the sound signal as the hold value from the peak holding means to the comparison means. In this case, since the peak value of each sound signal is repeatedly input to the comparison means, the comparison means can compare each peak value of the sound signal with the reference level. Therefore, it is possible to detect that the sound breakup continues to occur by the level excess detection circuit.

  On the other hand, in the configuration in which the peak holding unit is not initialized, for a sound signal whose volume level is repeatedly increased and decreased, for example, when the peak holding unit holds the maximum value of the sound signal in one day, the sound signal Even if the volume level is lowered, the comparison means always compares the maximum value with the reference level, and the sound crack detection circuit cannot detect that sound crack detection is continuing.

Feature A8. The peak holding means is
A hold capacitor (hold capacitor 191) that is charged by the sound signal input from the amplifying means, and holds the charging voltage of the hold capacitor as the peak value;
The reset means is
A discharge unit (discharge unit 211) which is connected to the hold capacitor and discharges the hold capacitor to clear the hold value of the peak holding unit;
A switching unit (switching switch 214) for switching the connection target of the hold capacitor to one of the comparison unit and the discharging unit;
Has
The game machine according to feature A7, wherein the switching unit causes the hold capacitor and the comparison unit to be in a cutoff state when the hold capacitor is connected to the discharge unit.

  In the configuration in which the hold value of the peak holding means is erased by discharging the hold capacitor, the hold value of the peak holding means fluctuates (decreases) with the discharge of the hold capacitor, and the comparing means changes the hold value during the fluctuation. The accuracy of comparison between the volume level of the sound signal and the reference level is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the feature A8, when the hold capacitor is discharged by the discharging unit, the switching unit cuts off the hold capacitor and the comparing unit, so that the volume of the sound signal by the comparing unit is cut off. There is no comparison between the level and the reference level. Therefore, it can be avoided that the charging voltage of the hold capacitor is compared with the reference level during the reset of the peak holding means (while the hold value is changing), and the comparison accuracy by the comparing means is lowered.

  Feature A9. The gaming machine according to the feature A7 or A8, characterized by further comprising reset execution means (oscillation circuit 217) for causing the reset means to repeatedly perform the hold value clearing and holding of the peak holding means. ..

  According to the characteristic A9, the reset execution means can realize a configuration in which the hold value of the peak holding means is repeatedly updated and the peak value of each sound signal is repeatedly input to the comparison means.

  In addition, when the sound level control circuit includes sound control means for controlling the operation of the amplification means, and the level excess detection circuit detects that the volume level of the sound signal is higher than the reference level, it outputs an excess signal indicating that effect. A structure for outputting to the control device, and after the sound control means receives the excess signal, the reset execution means continuously clears the hold value for the reception. It is preferable that

  According to this configuration, when the occurrence of sound breakup is detected by the level excess detection circuit, the hold value of the peak holding means is cleared after the excess signal is input to the sound control means. However, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the hold value is cleared and the output of the excess signal is stopped before the excess signal is input to the sound control means.

Feature A10. A sound control unit (sub-MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72) for controlling the operation of the amplification unit is provided,
When the level excess detection circuit detects that the volume level of the sound signal is higher than the reference level, it outputs an excess signal (sound cracking signal) to that effect to the control means. ,
The sound control means performs processing for reducing the sound volume level of the sound signal when the excess signal is output from the level excess detection circuit (a step in the sub MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, which has a function of executing the processing of S1404 and S1408.

  According to the characteristic A10, it is possible to prevent the timing of reducing the volume level of the sound signal from being delayed with respect to the timing of occurrence of sound crack in the output sound from the sound output unit. As a result, the output volume can be quickly reduced in order to eliminate the sound distortion.

Features A11. The volume level reducing means,
An amplification factor limiting unit that reduces the amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplification unit when the excess signal is output from the level excess detection circuit (the steps S1508 and S1710 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72 are performed. A game machine according to Feature A10, which has a function of executing).

  According to the characteristic A11, since the volume reduction is performed by the amplification factor limiting means, the hall manager, the player or the like operates the volume switch in order to eliminate the sound crack in the sound output means. It is not necessary to perform the above, and it is possible to preferably realize a configuration capable of eliminating sound cracks by quickly reducing the output volume.

  Feature A12. The characteristic level A11 is characterized in that the volume level reducing means can reduce the amplification factor in a plurality of steps by the amplification factor limiting means until the excess signal is no longer output from the level excess detection circuit. The game machine described.

  In the configuration in which the level excess detection circuit is connected to the branch path of the sound output path to which the sound output means is connected, when the sound level generation detection circuit detects the occurrence of sound crack in the sound output means, the sound output means already outputs The output volume of is likely to be loud enough to cause sound cracking. In this case, if the amount of reduction of the amplification factor once in the amplifying means is excessively large, the sound crack in the sound outputting means can be promptly eliminated, but the output sound volume from the sound outputting means is greatly increased. It is feared that the size of the player will become smaller and the player will feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, according to the feature A12, when the sound output unit outputs a sound crack, the amplification unit reduces the amplification factor in multiple steps. Therefore, the sound is amplified when the sound crack occurs. It is possible to prevent the amplification factor of the means from being excessively reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the amount of decrease in the output volume from the sound output means is too large.

Feature A13. The volume level reducing means,
When the amplification factor limiting unit reduces the amplification factor in a plurality of steps, after the amplification factor limiting unit reduces the amplification factor, the amplification factor limiting unit reduces the amplification factor to a next value. The gaming machine according to feature A12, which has a standby unit (a function of executing the process of step S1507 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72) that secures a crack continuation determination period).

  According to the characteristic A13, when the amplification factor is reduced in a plurality of stages by the amplification means, the waiting period is secured between the stages, so that the amplification factors are not reduced in a plurality of stages at a time, but amplified. The rate can be gradually reduced over time. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the unpleasant sensation that is given to the player by reducing the output volume.

Features A14. The volume level reducing means measures a duration during which the excess signal is continuously output when the excess signal is output from the level excess detection circuit (the sub MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72). Function for executing the processing of step S1506 in
The standby unit is for determining whether or not the duration measured by the measuring unit has reached the standby period,
The gaming machine according to feature A13, wherein the amplification factor limiting unit reduces the amplification factor when the standby unit determines that the duration has reached the standby period.

  According to the characteristic A14, when the sound breakage is continuously generated in the output sound from the sound output means, the sound volume can be reduced to eliminate the sound breakup. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sound volume from being limited when noise occurs in the sound signal only for a moment. Moreover, in the configuration in which the amplification factor of the amplification means is gradually reduced, the duration of sound cracking can be measured by using the waiting period. In this case, unlike the configuration in which the timing for measuring the duration of sound cracking and the waiting period are arranged in chronological order, the timing for measuring sound cracking and the waiting period are secured simultaneously in time series. Can be continuously secured, and sound crack measurement can be continuously performed when the amplification factor is gradually reduced.

Feature A15. The volume level reducing means,
The amplification factor is provided with excess determination means for determining whether or not the excess signal is output from the level excess detection circuit (function of executing the processes of steps S1503 and S1703 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound and light control device 72). The gaming machine according to any one of the features A12 to A14, characterized in that the output determination of the excess signal is performed by the excess determination means after the amplification rate is reduced by one level by the limiting means. ..

  According to the characteristic A15, in the configuration in which the amplification factor of the amplification means is reduced in a plurality of steps, every time the amplification factor is reduced by one step, it is determined whether or not the volume level of the sound signal exceeds the reference level. Since (sound break determination) is performed, it is possible to prevent the amplification factor from being further reduced even if the volume level of the sound signal does not exceed the reference level. Therefore, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the amplification factor is not excessively reduced.

<Feature B group>
The invention of the following characteristic group B is effective for the following problems.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a speaker as a sound output means, and the speaker outputs various effect sounds according to the gaming state, so that the degree of attention to the game can be increased. Further, since the output sound from the speaker is used as the notification sound, it becomes possible to notify the state of the gaming machine and the occurrence of fraud.

  The speaker outputs a sound when the sound signal is input from the amplifier, and the volume of the sound output from the speaker is determined by setting the amplification rate of the sound signal by the amplifier. In the gaming machine in which the amplification factor of the amplifier is variably set, it is possible to change the output volume from the speaker according to the amplification factor of the amplifier. For example, in a gaming machine provided with a volume switch, the amplification factor of the amplifier is changed by operating the volume switch, and thereby the output volume from the speaker is changed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-242242). See Japanese Patent Publication No. 2005-261808).

  However, when the volume level of the sound signal input to the speaker is higher than the allowable input level of the speaker, the sound output from the speaker may sound distorted due to distortion of the waveform of the sound signal. In this case, the output sound, which should improve the game playability and convenience, gives the player discomfort.

  On the other hand, when the volume switch is operated so that the amplification factor of the amplifier is reduced, the volume level is reduced for all parts of the sound signal input to the speaker, and the sound cracks generated in the speaker are suppressed. It can be resolved.

  Here, when the sound output from the speaker is tones with volume, the output sound includes a loud volume portion that is louder than other portions, so that the effect and the notification effect are enhanced. Has been.

  However, in the high volume part of the output sound, the volume level is likely to exceed the allowable input level of the speaker, and the sound is likely to be cracked. On the other hand, in the non-loud volume part, the volume level is less likely to exceed the allowable input level of the speaker, and the sound cracking is less likely to occur. Therefore, if the volume level is reduced for all parts of the sound signal by the volume switch, sound cracking can be eliminated in the period in which the high volume part is output, but in the period in which the non-loud volume part is output. Then, although the sound is not broken, there is a problem that the volume is further reduced and it becomes hard to hear.

  Therefore, if the difference between the volume levels of the high-volume part and the non-high-volume part in the output sound is reduced, sound cracks will occur in the high-volume part, and the volume of the non-high-volume part will be excessively low. It becomes possible to eliminate both of the above. However, if the difference between the volume levels of the high-volume part and the non-high-volume part is reduced, it is not possible to suppress the effect sound and the like, and the effect of the effect may be reduced.

  In addition, if the allowable input level of the speaker is moderately high relative to the volume level of the loud volume part, even if the difference in volume level between the loud volume part and the non-loud volume part is relatively large, the sound at the loud volume part It is possible to suppress cracking and excessive volume reduction in non-loud volume parts. Therefore, a designer or the like who designs a gaming machine should create sound data for outputting a performance sound or a notification sound so that the volume level of the high volume part is suitable for the allowable input level of the speaker. Is preferred.

  However, the sound data created by the designer or the like does not always match the allowable input level of the speaker. For example, if sound data must be created before the manufacturer or type of speaker is determined, or if the manufacturer or type of speaker is changed due to design changes, the sound level of the loud volume is The input level may be higher than the allowable input level, and as a result, problems such as sound cracking in the high volume part and excessively low volume in the non-high volume part occur. For this reason, designers have no choice but to create sound data that outputs a production sound without intonation in order to adapt the volume level of the output sound to any of a large number of types of speakers. The degree of freedom of creation is reduced.

Feature B1. With the gaming machine body (inner frame 13),
A gaming machine front body (front door frame 14) rotatably provided in front of the gaming machine with respect to the gaming machine body,
Storage means for storing sound data (common ROM 147 of sound/light control device 72);
Amplification means (amplifier 171) for amplifying a sound signal generated by the sound data stored in the storage means;
Sound output means (upper speaker 91, lower speaker 101) for outputting sound at a volume corresponding to the volume level of the sound signal by inputting the sound signal amplified by the amplifying means,
Equipped with
The storage means is provided in the gaming machine main body, the sound output means is a gaming machine provided in the gaming machine front body,
The sound signal amplified by the amplifying means is input, and an over-level detection circuit (sound breakage detection circuit 175) for detecting that the volume level of the sound signal exceeds a predetermined reference level is provided. And the gaming machine.

  In feature B1, the storage means for storing sound data is provided in the gaming machine body, and the sound output means is provided in the gaming machine front body, so that the gaming machine body and the gaming machine front body are manufactured separately. For example, the sound data for generating the sound signal may not match the sound output means. In this case, when an effect sound with inflection is output from the sound output means, there is concern that sound breakup may occur in the high volume part and excessive low volume in the non-high volume part.

  On the other hand, since the level excess detection circuit detects that the volume level of the sound signal input to the sound output means exceeds the reference level, if the reference level is the allowable input level of the sound output means, When the volume level of the sound signal exceeds the allowable input level of the sound output means, it can be detected as the occurrence of sound crack. In this case, by reducing the amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplifying means in accordance with the timing at which sound cracking occurs, sound cracking occurs even if the effect sound with intonation is output from the sound output means. It is possible to reduce the sound volume by reducing the sound volume in the high volume portion, and it is possible to prevent the sound volume from becoming excessively low in the non-high volume portion in which no sound distortion occurs. Therefore, with respect to the sound data created by the designer or the like, even if the volume level does not match the allowable input level of the sound output means, the sound output means can appropriately output the sound.

  As described above, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of freedom in creating sound data, and it is possible to preferably prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the occurrence of sound cracks in the sound output means.

  Feature B2. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the level excess detection circuit is provided in the gaming machine body of the gaming machine body and the gaming machine front body.

  According to the feature B2, since the level excess detection circuit is provided in the gaming machine main body, when the new gaming machine main body is installed along with the change of the model of the gaming machine, the sound output means is provided together with the gaming machine front body. Even if the existing game machine is diverted, the level excess detection circuit can be newly installed in the game machine.

  Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein the amplifying means is provided in the gaming machine body among the gaming machine body and the gaming machine front body.

  When the amplification means and the sound output means do not match each other as in the feature B3, the amplification factor of the amplification means is too large or too small with respect to the allowable input level of the sound output means, so that the sound data and the sound are reproduced. As in the case where the output means is not compatible, there is a concern that sound cracking may occur in the high volume portion and the volume may become excessively low in the non-high volume portion.

  Even in this case, since the sound level breakup detection circuit detects the sound crack occurrence, it is possible to reduce the amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplifying means at the timing when the sound crack occurrence is detected. That is, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of sound cracking in the high volume part and the excessive volume reduction in the non-high volume part.

Feature B4. A sound control unit (sub-MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72) for controlling the operation of the amplification unit is provided,
When the level excess detection circuit detects that the volume level of the sound signal is higher than the reference level, it outputs an excess signal (sound cracking signal) to that effect to the sound control means. Yes,
The sound control means,
An amplification factor limiting unit that reduces the amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplification unit when the excess signal is output from the level excess detection circuit (the steps S1508 and S1710 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72 are performed. Function to execute)
When the amplification factor limiting unit is limiting the amplification factor, the limitation releasing unit (sound light) that cancels the amplification factor limitation by the amplification factor limiting unit at a predetermined timing. A function of executing the processes of steps S1603, S1905, S1907, and S1912 in the sub MPU 142 of the control device 72),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B3 having the following features.

  According to the feature B4, the amplification factor limitation is released at a predetermined timing, so that the sound crack can be eliminated by limiting the amplification factor for the large volume portion, and the limitation of the amplification factor is released for the non-loud volume portion. Therefore, excessive reduction of volume can be avoided. In this case, it is possible to prevent the non-loud volume part from becoming hard to hear, and to suppress the reduction of the effect such as the effect produced by suppressing the output sound.

Feature B5. The sound control unit determines whether or not the output sound from the sound output unit is a notification sound for notifying that an abnormality has occurred (a notification sound including a fraudulent sound and a guide sound). It has a determination unit (a function of executing the process of step S1401 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound and light control device 72),
The amplification rate limiting unit reduces the amplification rate of the notification sound when the output sound is determined to be the notification sound by the notification sound determination unit (a sub unit of the sound/light control device 72). The MPU 142 has a function of executing the processing of step S1508),
The restriction canceling means cancels the restriction of the amplification factor in synchronization with the end timing of the output of the notification sound (the processing of step S1603 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72). The game machine according to feature B4, which has a function of performing).

  According to the feature B5, when the amplification rate is limited for the notification sound, the limitation of the amplification rate of the notification sound is canceled in synchronization with the end timing of the output of the notification sound. It is possible to avoid that the limitation of the amplification rate is continuously performed for the effect sound or the like even though the output of the sound is finished. Therefore, in the case where the notification sound among the sounds output from the sound output means is cracked, it is possible to eliminate the crack and to avoid the disadvantage that the volume of the effect sound or the like other than the notification sound is excessively reduced.

Feature B6. The sound control means determines the sound output from the sound output means is a sound effect for performing a game effect, a sound effect determination means (the process of step S1405 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72). Has the function of executing
The amplification rate limiting means reduces the amplification rate of the effect sound when the output sound is determined to be the effect sound by the effect sound determination means (a sub-sound of the sound/light control device 72). The function of executing the process of step S1710 in the MPU 142) is different.
The restriction releasing means releases the restriction of the amplification rate in accordance with the ending timing of the game time when the game time accompanied by the output of the effect sound is ended (game step releasing means (step in the sub MPU 142 of the sound and light control device 72). The gaming machine according to feature B4 or B5, which has a function of executing the processing of S1907.

  According to the feature B6, when the amplification rate is limited for the effect sound, the limitation of the amplification rate of the effect sound is canceled at the end timing of each game time, so that the effect sound of the current game time is changed. It is possible to avoid that the limitation of the amplification rate is continuously performed for the effect sound and the notification sound of the next game time, even though the output is completed. Therefore, in the case where the effect sound among the output sounds from the sound output means is distorted, it is possible to eliminate the distorted sound and avoid the inconvenience that the effect sound and the notification sound of the next game time become excessively small. it can.

  In addition, in one game time, after the variable display of the pattern is started on the display unit, the stop result corresponding to the result of the determination of whether or not to grant the privilege to the player is displayed to display the pattern. This is until the variable display is completed.

  Feature B7. The level excess detection circuit has a variable setting means (second resistor R2) capable of variably setting the reference level. The game according to any one of features B1 to B6. Machine.

  According to the feature B7, since the reference level can be changed according to the allowable input level of the sound output means, regardless of the manufacturer or the type of the sound output means, the allowable input level and the reference of the sound output means. You can avoid that the level does not match. Therefore, the detection accuracy of the level excess detection circuit can be improved by setting the reference level according to the actual allowable input level of the sound output means.

Feature B8. The level excess detection circuit includes a comparison unit (comparator 202) that compares a volume level of the sound signal input from the amplification unit with a reference level, and a reference voltage (reference voltage Va that has a voltage value of the reference level). ) Is generated, the volume level of the sound signal exceeds the reference level by the comparison means comparing the sound signal with the reference voltage. Is to detect
The voltage generator holds a voltage value of the reference voltage at a predetermined value,
The gaming machine according to Feature B7, wherein the variable setting unit variably sets the voltage value of the reference voltage held by the voltage generation unit.

  According to the feature B8, the reference level is variably set in the level excess detection circuit in which the occurrence of sound crack is detected by comparing the volume level of the sound signal with the reference level by the comparison means. it can. Moreover, since the voltage value of the reference voltage is set to the reference level, the reference level can be easily changed by simply changing the voltage value.

  The comparison means is preferably a comparator. In this case, it is possible to improve the responsiveness when detecting the sound crack, as compared with the case where the comparison unit is an operational amplifier.

  Feature B9. The variable setting means has a variable resistor (second resistor R2) for varying the resistance value, and changes the voltage value of the reference voltage by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor. The game machine according to feature B8.

  According to the feature B9, the reference level can be changed by an easy operation of changing the resistance value of the variable resistor.

Feature B10. The comparison means includes a first terminal (−input terminal) to which the sound signal is input from the amplification means, and a second terminal (+input terminal) to which the reference voltage generated by the voltage generation unit is input. Has
The voltage generator is
A shunt regulator (shunt regulator 203) that holds the voltage value of the reference voltage at the predetermined value;
A first resistor (first resistor R1) and a second resistor (second resistor R2) connected in series,
Has
The shunt regulator is
A reference connected between the first resistor and the second resistor,
A cathode connected to the opposite side of the first resistor from the second resistor and connected to the second terminal of the comparing means;
Has
At least one of the first resistor and the second resistor is the variable resistor, the gaming machine according to feature B9.

  According to feature B10, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the reference level can be changed by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor. Moreover, since the voltage generator includes the shunt regulator, it is possible to improve the holding accuracy of holding the reference voltage at the predetermined value. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the reference level fluctuates and the detection accuracy of the level excess detection circuit decreases.

Feature B11. The first resistor is a fixed resistor whose resistance value is not variable,
The gaming machine according to Feature B10, wherein the second resistor is the variable resistor.

  In the configuration in which the reference of the shunt regulator is connected between the first resistance and the second resistance, and the cathode is connected to the first resistance, the reference current flowing through the reference flows through the first resistance, so that the first resistance Power loss will occur.

  On the other hand, according to the feature B11, since the first resistance is the fixed resistance, it is avoided that the resistance value of the first resistance is increased and the power loss in the first resistance increases due to the reference current. it can. Therefore, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the reference level can be changed while suppressing the power loss in the first resistor R1.

  Feature B12. The variable setting means has a variable operation section (operation knob 112) provided on the back side of the gaming machine body, and changes the reference level by operating the variable operation section. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B7 to B11.

  According to the characteristic B12, since the variable operation unit capable of changing the reference level is provided, even if the sound data stored in the storage means does not match the allowable input level of the sound output means, the allowable input The reference level can be easily variably set according to the level. That is, the reference level can be easily set to a value at which sound breakage in the sound output means can be detected by the level excess detection circuit. Moreover, since the variable operation unit is provided on the back side of the main body of the gaming machine, it is difficult for the player to operate the variable operation unit, and the hall manager preferably sets the state (reference level) of the variable operation unit. Can be managed.

Feature B13. An outer frame (outer frame 11) that supports the game machine main body so that it can be opened and closed,
The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B12, wherein the sound output means is provided on the outer frame in addition to the front body of the game machine.

  In the configuration in which the gaming machine main body is supported by the outer frame, due to the fact that the gaming machine main body and the outer frame are manufactured separately, sound data, in addition to the sound output means of the gaming machine main body, There is a concern that the content does not match the sound output means of the outer frame.

  On the other hand, according to the feature B13, the level excess detection circuit can detect the occurrence of sound breaks in the sound output means of the outer frame in addition to the sound output means of the gaming machine body. In this case, similarly to the sound output means of the gaming machine main body, with respect to the sound output means of the outer frame, it is possible to reduce the volume of the portion of the output sound where the sound crack occurs, and eliminate the sound crack. It is possible to prevent the volume of the portion where the sound crack is not generated from being excessively reduced.

<Characteristic C group>
The invention of the following characteristic group C is effective for the following problems.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a speaker as a sound output means, and the speaker outputs various effect sounds according to the gaming state, so that the degree of attention to the game can be increased. Further, since the output sound from the speaker is used as the notification sound, it becomes possible to notify the state of the gaming machine and the occurrence of fraud.

  The speaker outputs a sound when the sound signal is input from the amplifier, and the volume of the sound output from the speaker is determined by setting the amplification rate of the sound signal by the amplifier. In the gaming machine in which the amplification factor of the amplifier is variably set, it is possible to change the output volume from the speaker according to the amplification factor of the amplifier. For example, in a game machine provided with a volume switch, the amplification factor of the amplifier is changed by operating the volume switch, and thereby the output volume from the speaker is changed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Publication No. 2004-242242). See Japanese Patent Publication No. 2005-261808).

  However, when the volume level of the sound signal input to the speaker is higher than the allowable input level of the speaker, the sound output from the speaker may sound distorted due to distortion of the waveform of the sound signal. In this case, the output sound, which should improve the game playability and convenience, gives the player discomfort.

  On the other hand, when the volume switch is operated so that the amplification factor of the amplifier is reduced, the volume level of the sound signal input to the speaker is reduced, and the sound crack generated in the speaker can be eliminated. It will be possible.

  Here, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of speakers, sound is output from all speakers due to different sound signals being input to each speaker and the allowable input level being different for each speaker due to tolerance. However, it is considered that sound cracking may occur only in some speakers.

  In this case, by operating the volume switch to collectively reduce the output volume of all the speakers, it is possible to eliminate the sound breakage that occurs in some of the speakers. However, in this case, the output volume of the speaker having no sound cracking becomes small, and the sound cracking can be eliminated, but the effect and notification effect by the effect sound or the notification sound from each speaker may decrease. .. Therefore, it is conceivable to provide a volume switch individually for all speakers, but for hall managers, etc., the speaker with the sound crack among the multiple speakers is identified and the sound crack is eliminated for that speaker. The task of reducing the volume to the extent that it is said becomes difficult.

Feature C1. Amplification means (amplifier 171) for amplifying the sound signal,
A plurality of sound output means (upper speaker 91, lower speaker 101) for outputting sound at a volume corresponding to the volume level of the sound signal by inputting the sound signal amplified by the amplifying means, ,
A level excess detection circuit (sound break detection circuit 175) which receives the sound signal amplified by the amplification means and detects that the volume level of the sound signal exceeds a predetermined reference level;
Equipped with
The level excess detection circuit is provided for each sound output means, and detects that the volume level is higher than the reference level for the sound signal input to the corresponding sound output means. A gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the characteristic C1, the level excess detection circuit detects that the volume level of the sound signal input to the sound output means exceeds the reference level. Therefore, if the reference level is set as the allowable input level of the sound output means. It is possible to detect that a sound break has occurred when the volume level of the sound signal exceeds the allowable input level of the sound output means. In this case, the amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplifying means is reduced in accordance with the timing when the sound crack occurs, whereby the sound crack in the sound output means can be preferably eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the occurrence of sound cracks in the sound output means.

  Moreover, since the sound level breakup detection circuit individually detects the occurrence of sound cracks for each sound output means, the sound output means in which sound cracking has occurred is reduced in volume to eliminate sound cracks. With respect to the sound output means in which no crack is generated, it is possible to keep the volume as it is without reducing the volume. Therefore, when the sound cracks are generated in some of the sound output means among the plurality of sound output means, the sound cracks can be eliminated, and the output sound of all the sound output means can be reduced. It is possible to avoid the reduction of the effect of presentation and the effect of notification.

  As described above, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of sound output means, when a sound crack occurs in the sound output means, it is possible to preferably eliminate the sound crack, and moreover, with the elimination of the sound crack. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect and the notification effect from being lowered.

Feature C2. A sound control unit (sub-MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72) for controlling the operation of the amplification unit is provided,
When each level excess detection circuit detects that the volume level of the sound signal input to the corresponding sound output means is higher than the reference level, an excess signal (sound cracking signal) indicating that is detected. To output to each of the sound control means,
The sound control means,
When the excess signal is output from at least one of the level excess detection circuits, the sound output means corresponding to the level excess detection circuit performs processing for reducing the volume level of the sound signal. The gaming machine according to feature C1, which has a volume level reducing means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1404 and S1408 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound and light control device 72).

  According to the characteristic C2, in the case of eliminating the sound crack generated in a part of the sound output means of the plurality of sound output means, the timing of reducing the volume level of the sound signal with respect to the timing of the sound crack. Delay can be suppressed. This makes it possible to quickly reduce the output sound for some of the sound output means in order to eliminate the sound breakage.

Feature C3. The volume level reducing means,
When the excess signal is output from at least one of the level excess detection circuits, which of the plurality of sound output units is to be the volume level reduction target by specifying the output source of the excess signal? Sound cracking specifying means (a function of executing the process of step S1704 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72) for specifying
Amplification factor limiting means (step S1710 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72) for reducing the amplification factor of the sound signal, which is input to the sound output device specified by the sound crack specifying device, as a target. Function that executes the processing of
The gaming machine according to feature C2, which has:

  According to the characteristic C3, in order to eliminate the sound crack generated in some of the plurality of sound output means, the volume limit is implemented by the amplification rate limiting means, so that the hall manager or the player. However, it is not necessary to perform a work such as operating a volume switch in order to eliminate sound cracks, and a configuration in which the output sound is quickly reduced in order to eliminate sound cracks can be suitably realized.

Feature C4. The volume level reducing means,
A decrease amount determining unit (a value of the effect sound limit counter S) reduced by the amplification factor limiting unit is greater than a predetermined determination value (M times 2). A function of executing the process of step S1804 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72),
The sound signal input to the sound output unit that is not specified by the sound crack specifying unit when the decrease amount of the amplification factor of the sound signal is determined to be larger than the determination value by the decrease amount determination unit. The sub-limiter for reducing the amplification factor of the amplifying unit (the function of executing the processes of steps S1803, S1806, and S1807 in the sub-MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72) is targeted for The gaming machine described in Feature C3.

  When sound cracking occurs in some of the sound outputting means, the sound breaking is eliminated by reducing the output volume only for the sound outputting means in which the sound breaking occurs. However, if the volume decrease amount becomes large to some extent, the difference in the output volume between the sound output means with sound cracking and the sound cracking means without sound cracking becomes large, and the sound output means of each sound output means There is concern that the volume balance of the sounds output from each of them may be lost.

  On the other hand, according to the characteristic C4, not only the output sound from the sound output unit in which the sound crack has occurred, but also the output sound from the sound output unit in which the sound crack has not occurred is appropriately reduced in volume. Therefore, the difference in sound volume between the sound output means in which sound cracking has occurred and the sound output means in which sound cracking has not occurred does not become excessively large. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sound volume of the sound output unit in which the sound is broken and the sound output unit in which the sound is not broken from being out of balance.

  Feature C5. The gaming machine according to Feature C4, wherein a rate at which the amplification rate is reduced by the sub-limitation unit is smaller than a rate at which the amplification rate is reduced by the amplification rate limitation unit.

  According to the characteristic C5, the decrease range of the output volume of the sound output unit in which the sound crack does not occur is smaller than the decrease range of the output volume of the sound output unit in which the sound crack occurs. Unlike the case where the output sound volumes from all the sound output means are reduced by the same amount of reduction, it is possible to eliminate the sound crack while suppressing the reduction of the effect effect and the like.

Feature C6. The volume level reducing unit can reduce the amplification factor in a plurality of stages by the amplification factor limiting unit until the excess signal is no longer output from the level excess detection circuit.
The gaming machine according to feature C4 or C5, wherein the number of stages in which the amplification factor is reduced by the sub-limitation unit is smaller than the number of stages in which the amplification factor is reduced by the amplification factor limitation unit.

  According to the characteristic C6, the amplification factor of the sound output unit in which the sound crack has occurred is reduced in a plurality of steps by the amplification unit. Therefore, the amplification factor of the amplification unit is excessively reduced in accordance with the occurrence of the sound crack. That can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the amount of decrease in the output volume from the sound output means is too large.

  Moreover, since the number of steps for reducing the volume of the sound output unit in which sound cracking does not occur is smaller than the number of steps for reducing the volume of the sound output unit in which sound cracking occurs, Unlike the case where the output sound volume from the sound output means is reduced by the same number of steps, it is possible to suppress the reduction of the effect effect and the notification effect.

  Feature C7. When there are a plurality of sound output means that are not specified by the sound crack specifying means, the sub-limitation means individually sets a ratio for reducing the amplification factor of each sound signal input to the sound output means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C4 to C6, which is characterized by being a thing.

  According to the characteristic C7, in the configuration in which the output volume of the sound output unit in which the sound crack is generated and the sound output unit in which the sound crack is not generated can be balanced, the sound output without the sound crack is generated. When there are multiple means, the output volume reduction range is set individually for each sound output means in which sound cracking does not occur, so balance the output sound volume between sound output means in which sound cracking does not occur. You can As a result, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of sound cracks in the sound output means, and to harmonize the volume of the output sounds from all the sound output means.

Feature C8. The plurality of sound output means include upper sound output means (upper speaker 91) provided on the upper portion of the gaming machine, and lower sound output means (lower speaker 101) provided on the lower portion of the gaming machine. Is included,
In the case where the sub-limitation unit has a plurality of the sound output units that are not specified by the sound crack specifying unit, and the sound output units include both the upper sound output unit and the lower sound output unit. Setting differently the rate of reducing the amplification rate of the sound signal input to the upper side sound output means and the rate of reducing the amplification rate of the sound signal input to the lower side sound output means The gaming machine according to Feature C7, which is

  The output sound from the upper side sound output means and the output sound from the lower side sound output means differ from each other in that the distance between the sound output means and the player's head is different, and the like May be different.

  Therefore, according to the characteristic C8, in the configuration in which the output volume can be balanced between the sound output unit in which sound cracking is generated and the sound output unit in which sound cracking is not generated, sound cracking is not generated. When the sound output means includes both the upper sound output means and the lower sound output means, the upper sound output means and the lower sound output means cause a difference in the reduction range of the output volume. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the output sound from each of the sound output means in which the sound is not broken.

Feature C9. In the plurality of sound output means, a treble output means (upper speaker 91) into which at least a sound signal for outputting a treble is input and a bass output means (below) in which a sound signal for outputting at least a bass is input. Side speaker 101) is included,
The sub-limiter has a plurality of the sound output means not specified by the sound breakage specifying means, and when the sound output means includes both the high-pitched sound output means and the low-pitched sound output means, the high-pitched sound is output. The rate of reducing the amplification rate of the sound signal input to the output means and the rate of reducing the amplification rate of the sound signal input to the bass output means are set differently. The gaming machine described in C7 or C8.

  It is conceivable that the output sound from the high-pitched sound output means and the low-pitched sound output means may have different audible sounds for the player due to the fact that the high-pitched sound and the low-pitched sound have different frequency bands.

  Therefore, according to the characteristic C9, in the configuration in which the output volume can be balanced between the sound output unit in which sound cracking is generated and the sound output unit in which sound cracking is not generated, sound cracking is not generated. When the sound output means includes both the high-pitched sound output means and the low-pitched sound output means, the high-tone output means and the low-tone output means cause a difference in the reduction range of the output volume. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the high tone and the low tone in which the sound is not broken.

Feature C10. The plurality of sound output means includes a set of sound output means,
The sub-limiter means includes a plurality of the sound output means that are not specified by the sound crack specifying means, and when the sound output means includes both of the set of sound output means, The gaming machine according to any one of features C4 to C9, characterized in that the rate of reducing the amplification factor of each sound signal input to the sound output means is set to be the same.

  According to the characteristic C10, even if the output sounds from a plurality of sound output means are heard by the player, the output sounds have the same pitch (frequency band) and the installation heights are the same. It is thought that there are cases where the same is the case.

  Therefore, according to the characteristic C10, in the configuration in which the output volume can be balanced between the sound output means in which sound cracking occurs and the sound output means in which sound cracking does not occur, no sound cracking occurs. Even when there are a plurality of sound output means, when the sound output means includes a set of sound output means, the output volume of the set of sound output means is reduced in the same range. With this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of discomfort in how to hear the output sound, rather than varying the reduction range of the output volume with respect to the set of sound output means in which the sound is not broken.

  Feature C11. Any one of the features C1 to C10 characterized in that each of the level excess detection circuits has a variable setting means (second resistor R2) capable of individually variably setting the reference level. Gaming machine described in one.

  According to the characteristic C11, since it is possible to set the reference level for each of the level excess detection circuits in accordance with the allowable input level of the sound output means, regardless of the manufacturer or type of each sound output means. The occurrence of sound cracks in the sound output means can be individually detected by the level excess detection circuit. Therefore, when the performance differs for each sound output means, or when the allowable input level of each sound output means includes a tolerance, the reference level is set according to the actual allowable input level for each sound output means. As a result, the detection accuracy of each level excess detection circuit can be improved.

<Feature D group>
The invention of the following characteristic group D is effective for the following problems.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a speaker as a sound output means, and the speaker outputs various effect sounds according to the gaming state, so that the degree of attention to the game can be increased. Further, since the output sound from the speaker is used as the notification sound, it becomes possible to notify the state of the gaming machine and the occurrence of fraud.

  The speaker outputs a sound when the sound signal is input from the amplifier, and the volume of the sound output from the speaker is determined by setting the amplification rate of the sound signal by the amplifier. In the gaming machine in which the amplification factor of the amplifier is variably set, it is possible to change the output volume from the speaker according to the amplification factor of the amplifier. For example, in a gaming machine provided with a volume switch, the amplification factor of the amplifier is changed by operating the volume switch, and thereby the output volume from the speaker is changed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-242242). See Japanese Patent Publication No. 2005-261808).

  However, when the volume level of the sound signal input to the speaker is higher than the allowable input level of the speaker, the sound output from the speaker may sound distorted due to distortion of the waveform of the sound signal. In this case, the output sound, which should improve the game playability and convenience, gives the player discomfort.

  On the other hand, when the volume switch is operated so that the amplification factor of the amplifier is reduced, the volume level of the sound signal input to the speaker is reduced, and the sound crack generated in the speaker can be eliminated. It will be possible.

  However, when a hall manager, a player, or the like operates the volume switch, the operation mode is not always the mode suitable for sound cracking each time. For example, in the configuration in which the volume switch is arranged on the back side of the game machine, the amplifier is operated to the extent that the hall manager does not crack the sound outside the business hours of the game hall (for example, before opening the store, after closing the store, and on regular holidays). It is assumed that the volume switch is operated so that the amplification factor of is reduced, but this does not eliminate the sound crack at the timing when the sound crack actually occurs. Also, with the configuration in which the volume switch is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, the player can operate the volume switch during the game, but it is not possible to operate the volume switch each time a sound crack occurs. The volume switch is operated more frequently, which is not realistic for the player.

Feature D1. Amplification means (amplifier 171) for amplifying the sound signal,
Sound output means (upper speaker 91, lower speaker 101) for outputting sound at a volume corresponding to the volume level of the sound signal by inputting the sound signal amplified by the amplifying means,
A level excess detection circuit (sound break detection circuit 175) which receives the sound signal amplified by the amplification means and detects that the volume level of the sound signal exceeds a predetermined reference level;
Sound control means (sub-MPU 142 of sound/light control device 72) for controlling the operation of the amplification means;
Equipped with
When the level excess detection circuit detects that the volume level of the sound signal is higher than the reference level, it outputs an excess signal (sound cracking signal) to that effect to the sound control means. Yes,
The sound control means performs a sound volume level reduction process for reducing the sound volume level of the sound signal when the excess signal is output from the level excess detection circuit in a situation where the gaming machine is in a specific state. A game machine characterized by having level reducing means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1404 and S1408 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound and light control device 72).

  According to the feature D1, the level excess detection circuit detects that the volume level of the sound signal input to the sound output means exceeds the reference level. Therefore, if the reference level is set as the allowable input level of the sound output means. It is possible to detect that a sound break has occurred when the volume level of the sound signal exceeds the allowable input level of the sound output means. For this reason, when the gaming machine is in the specific state, the sound level reduction processing is performed in synchronization with the timing when the sound crack occurs, so that it is possible to preferably eliminate the sound crack occurrence in the sound output means. .. Therefore, it is possible to properly use whether or not to eliminate the sound crack of the output sound, depending on the game state, the type of the output sound, and the like.

  In addition, when the sound crack is eliminated, the level excess detection circuit outputs an excess signal when the sound crack is detected. Therefore, the sound output means outputs the sound at the timing when the sound crack occurs. It is possible to prevent the timing of reducing the volume level of the signal from being delayed. Therefore, the output volume can be quickly reduced in order to eliminate the sound distortion.

  As described above, it is possible to preferably prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the occurrence of sound cracks in the sound output means.

Feature D2. An operation unit (volume switch 111) that can be switched to a plurality of states by being operated,
The volume level reducing means,
When the excess signal is output from the level excess detection circuit, an amplification factor limiting unit (sub unit of the sound/light control device 72, which reduces the amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplification unit according to the state of the operating unit, is output. The game machine according to feature D1 having a function of executing the processes of steps S1508 and S1710 in the MPU 142.

  According to the feature D2, when the occurrence of sound crack is detected by the level excess detection circuit, the output volume is reduced by the amplification factor limiting means, so that the hall manager, the player, etc. switch the volume at the timing of sound crack occurrence. It is possible to preferably realize a configuration capable of eliminating sound cracks by promptly reducing the output volume without having to operate the like.

  Here, in the configuration in which the volume is reduced when a sound break occurs in the output sound from the sound output means, the sound break can be eliminated, but the effect is reduced by the output sound by reducing the volume. The notification effect may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to this configuration, the output volume from the sound output means is reduced according to the state of the operating means. Therefore, by operating the operating means, even if sound cracking occurs, the sound cracking will occur. You can switch to a mode that does not resolve. Therefore, it is possible to select whether to prioritize the elimination of the sound breakage generated in the output sound or the maintenance of the output volume, and the selection can be performed by an easy operation of operating the operating means.

Feature D3. The operation means switches between a first state (a state in which the position is adjusted to the scale F) and a second state (a state in which the position is adjusted to any one of the scales 1 to 5) different from the first state. Is possible,
The amplification factor limiting means reduces the amplification factor when the operating device is in the first state, and does not reduce the amplification factor when the operating device is in the second state. The gaming machine described in Feature D2.

  According to Feature D3, by setting the operating means in the first state in advance, it is possible to set the mode to eliminate the sound cracking when the sound cracking occurs, and set the operating means in the second state in advance. By setting it, it is possible to set a mode in which the sound crack is not eliminated even if the sound crack occurs. Therefore, it is possible to select which of elimination of the sound crack and maintenance of the output volume is prioritized by an easy work of switching the operation means to the first state or the second state.

  Feature D4. The amplification rate limiting means reduces the amplification rate when the operation means is in the first state, provided that the sound output from the sound output means is a production sound for performing a game production. The gaming machine according to Feature D3, wherein the amplification factor is not reduced when the operating means is in the second state.

  According to the characteristic D4, it is possible to appropriately select, by the operating means, which one of the elimination of the sound cracking and the maintenance of the volume should be prioritized, depending on the contribution of the effect sound to the enhancement of the playability in the gaming machine. ..

Feature D5. The volume level reducing means has an excess determining means (a function of executing the process of step S1703 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72) for determining whether or not the excess signal is output from the level excess detecting circuit. Then
The excess determination means determines the output of the excess signal when the operation means is in the first state, provided that the sound output from the sound output means is the effect sound, and the operation means The gaming machine according to Feature D4, in which the output determination of the excess signal is not performed when is in the second state.

  According to the feature D5, when the effect sound is being output from the sound output means and the operation means is in the second state, processing for canceling the sound break even if sound break occurs in the effect sound Is not done. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the sound control means on the condition that there is no problem even if it is not determined whether or not the sound crack has occurred.

  Feature D6. The amplification rate limiting means is capable of not reducing the amplification rate according to the type of sound output from the sound output means even when the operating means is in the first state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D3 to D5.

  For example, in the case where the operation means is set to the first state for the purpose of prioritizing elimination of sound cracking over holding of a large volume of effect sound, if sound cracking occurs in the output sound, effect sound is generated. Not only this, for example, the sound volume of the notification sound is also reduced to eliminate sound cracks, and the notification effect of the notification sound may be reduced. In other words, depending on the type of the sound output from the sound output means, the volume peculiar to the sound may be reduced to reduce the effect peculiar to the sound.

  On the other hand, according to the feature D6, even if the operation unit is in a state (first state) that prioritizes elimination of sound breakage over maintaining output volume, sound breakup is eliminated depending on the type of output sound. Instead, it is forcibly prioritized to maintain or enhance the effect of the sound. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the unique effects of the different types of output sounds.

  Feature D7. The amplification factor limiting means sets the amplification factor even when the operating means is in the first state, provided that the sound output from the sound output means is a fraudulent sound for notifying the fraudulent occurrence. The gaming machine according to Feature D6, which is not reduced.

  According to the characteristic D7, when the output sound from the sound output means is a fraudulent sound, in order to prevent the fraud prevention effect of the fraudulent sound from deteriorating, maintaining the output volume is more compulsory than eliminating sound cracking. Is prioritized. As a result, the fraud prevention effect can be suitably exerted on the fraudulent sound regardless of the state of the operating means.

  The sound control means includes means for determining whether or not the sound signal input to the sound output means is a signal for outputting a fraudulent sound from the sound output means. The limiting means does not reduce the amplification factor even when the operating means is in the first state on condition that the sound signal is a signal for outputting the fraudulent sound. Preferably.

Feature D8. The volume level reducing means has an excess determining means (a function of executing the process of step S1703 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72) for determining whether or not the excess signal is output from the level excess detecting circuit. Then
The gaming machine according to Feature D7, wherein when the sound output from the sound output unit is the fraudulent sound, the excess determination unit does not perform output determination of the excess signal.

  According to the characteristic D8, when the fraudulent sound is output from the sound output means, the processing for canceling the fraudulent sound is performed regardless of the state of the operation means, even if the fraudulent sound is cracked. Absent. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the sound control means on the condition that there is no problem even if it is not determined whether or not the sound crack has occurred.

  Feature D9. The amplification factor limiting means is capable of reducing the amplification factor according to the type of sound output from the sound output means even when the operating means is in the second state. The gaming machine described in any one of the features D3 to D8.

  For example, in the case where the operation means is set to the second state for the purpose of giving priority to the improvement of the effect of the effect sound over the elimination of the sound effect, the effect sound is generated even if the output sound is distorted. Not only is the output volume of the voice message not reduced, but the voice message with the sound cracking makes it difficult for the player to hear. That is, by giving priority to maintaining the output volume rather than eliminating the sound breakup, the effect peculiar to the sound may be rather deteriorated depending on the type of the sound output from the sound output means.

  On the other hand, according to the characteristic D9, even when the operation unit is in the state (second state) in which the maintenance of the output volume is prioritized over the sound crack elimination, the output volume is maintained depending on the type of the output sound. Rather than that, it is forcibly prioritized to maintain or enhance the effect of the sound by eliminating the sound crack. For this reason, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the peculiar effects of different types of output sounds.

  Feature D10. Even when the operation means is in the second state, the amplification factor limiting means is provided that the sound output from the sound output means is a guide sound for guiding the player of the state of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to Feature D9, characterized in that the amplification factor is reduced.

  According to the characteristic D10, when the output sound from the sound output means is the guide sound, the sound crack elimination is forcibly prioritized over the maintenance of the output volume so that the guide effect of the guide sound is not deteriorated. To be done. Accordingly, for example, when the guide sound is a voice message, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the voice message has a cracked sound and the content cannot be heard. That is, the guidance effect can be suitably exerted on the guidance sound regardless of the state of the operating means.

  The sound control means includes means for determining whether or not the sound signal input to the sound output means is a signal for outputting the guide sound from the sound output means, and the amplification factor. The limiting means reduces the amplification factor even when the operating means is in the second state, on condition that the sound signal is determined to be a signal for outputting the guide sound. Is preferred.

Feature D11. The operation means is switchable to a plurality of states including the second state, which is different from the first state,
The sound control means,
When the operating means is not in the first state, the first amplification rate setting means (sub-MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72) sets the amplification rate of the sound signal in the amplification means according to the state of the operating means. The game machine according to any one of the features D3 to D10, which has a function of executing the process of step S1407 in step S1407.

  According to the characteristic D11, by operating the operating means, it is possible to select which one of the elimination of sound cracking and the maintenance of the output volume is prioritized, and the output volume from the sound output means can be changed. it can. Further, since a switch for eliminating sound cracking and maintaining the output volume and a switch for adjusting the volume are provided as an operation means together, the switches are provided separately. The number of members for configuring the gaming machine can be reduced as compared with the configuration described above.

Feature D12. The sound control means,
When the operation means is in the first state and the excess signal is not output from the level excess detection circuit, the amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplification means is a predetermined value (amplifier 171). Any of the features D3 to D11 characterized in that it has a second amplification factor setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1502 and 1702 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound and light control device 72) for setting to the maximum value). The gaming machine described in one.

  According to the feature D12, when the operation unit is in the state (first state) where the elimination of the sound breakage is prioritized over the maintenance of the output volume, the output volume from the sound output unit is equal to a predetermined volume. To be done. In this case, performing the work of setting the operation means to the first state also involves performing the work of setting the output volume, so that the work required for volume adjustment can be facilitated.

Feature D13. A gaming machine front body (front door frame 14) that constitutes a gaming machine front portion and is rotatably provided in front of the gaming machine,
A gaming machine main body (inner frame 13) provided on the rear side of the gaming machine front body,
Equipped with
The game machine described in any one of the features D2 to D12, characterized in that the operation means is provided on the back side of the main body of the game machine.

  According to the characteristic D13, since it is difficult for the player to operate the operating means, the hall manager can appropriately manage the state of the operating means.

Feature D14. Based on the fact that a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not to give the privilege to the player, and based on the result of the determination, the privilege is given to the player. Main control means (main control device 71)
The sound control unit is a sub-control unit that performs a predetermined notification process based on the information output from the main control unit,
The operation means is connected to the sound control means of the main control means and the sound control means, and outputs a signal indicating the state of the operation means to the sound control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D13.

  According to the characteristic D14, the signal indicating the state of the operating means is output from the operating means to the sound control means. Therefore, even if the illegal board is connected to the sound control means instead of the operating means, the illegal operation is illegal. It is possible to prevent the main control unit from being controlled by the board and the privilege being illegally given. Thus, it is possible to appropriately provide the fraud countermeasure to the gaming machine provided with the operating means.

Feature D15. Based on the fact that a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not to give the privilege to the player, and based on the result of the determination, the privilege is given to the player. Main control means (main control device 71)
The sound control means is a sub-control means (sound light control device 72) that performs a predetermined notification process based on the information output from the main control means,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims D1 to D14, wherein the level excess detection circuit is connected to the sound control means of the main control means and the sound control means.

  According to the characteristic D15, since the excess signal indicating the occurrence of sound crack is output from the level excess detection circuit to the sound control means, even if the unauthorized board is connected to the sound control means instead of the level excess detection circuit. It is possible to avoid that the privilege is illegally given by controlling the main control means by the illegal board. As a result, it is possible to favorably provide improper countermeasures to the gaming machine provided with the level excess detection circuit.

<Feature E group>
The invention of the following characteristic E group is effective for the following problems.

  When a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a speaker as sound output means, various effect sounds are output from the speaker according to the game state, so that the degree of attention to the game can be increased. In addition, by outputting the notification sound from the speaker, it is possible to notify the state of the gaming machine and the occurrence of fraud.

  The speaker outputs a sound when the sound signal is input from the amplifier, and the volume of the sound output from the speaker is determined by setting the amplification rate of the sound signal by the amplifier. In the gaming machine in which the amplification factor of the amplifier is variably set, it is possible to change the output volume from the speaker according to the amplification factor of the amplifier. For example, in a game machine provided with a volume switch, the amplification factor of the amplifier is changed by operating the volume switch, and thereby the output volume from the speaker is changed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Publication No. 2004-242242). See Japanese Patent Publication No. 2005-261808).

  However, when the volume level of the sound signal input to the speaker is higher than the allowable input level of the speaker, the sound output from the speaker may sound distorted due to distortion of the waveform of the sound signal. In this case, the output sound, which should improve the game playability and convenience, gives the player discomfort.

  On the other hand, when the volume switch is operated so that the amplification factor of the amplifier is reduced, the volume level of the sound signal input to the speaker is reduced, and the sound crack generated in the speaker can be eliminated. It will be possible.

  However, when a hall manager, a player, or the like operates the volume switch, the operation mode is not always the mode suitable for sound cracking each time. For example, in the configuration in which the volume switch is arranged on the back side of the game machine, the amplifier is operated to the extent that the hall manager does not crack the sound outside the business hours of the game hall (for example, before opening the store, after closing the store, and on regular holidays). It is assumed that the volume switch is operated so that the amplification factor of is reduced, but this does not eliminate the sound crack at the timing when the sound crack actually occurs. Also, with the configuration in which the volume switch is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, the player can operate the volume switch during the game, but it is not possible to operate the volume switch each time a sound crack occurs. The volume switch is operated more frequently, which is not realistic for the player.

Feature E1. Amplification means (amplifier 171) for amplifying the sound signal,
Sound output means (upper speaker 91, lower speaker 101) for outputting sound at a volume corresponding to the volume level of the sound signal by inputting the sound signal amplified by the amplifying means,
A level excess detection circuit (sound break detection circuit 175) which receives the sound signal amplified by the amplification means and detects that the volume level of the sound signal exceeds a predetermined reference level;
Sound control means (sub-MPU 142 of sound/light control device 72) for controlling the operation of the amplification means;
Equipped with
When the level excess detection circuit detects that the volume level of the sound signal is higher than the reference level, it outputs an excess signal (sound cracking signal) to that effect to the sound control means. Yes,
The sound control means,
Whether or not the excess signal is output from the level excess detection circuit when the sound output from the sound output unit is a performance sound for performing a predetermined game performance in a situation where the gaming machine is in a specific state A gaming machine having an excess determination unit (a function of executing the process of step S1703 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound and light control device 72) for determining.

  According to the characteristic E1, the level excess detection circuit detects that the volume level of the sound signal input to the sound output means exceeds the reference level. Therefore, if the reference level is set as the allowable input level of the sound output means. It is possible to detect that a sound break has occurred when the volume level of the sound signal exceeds the allowable input level of the sound output means.

  Moreover, since it is determined whether or not a sound crack has occurred with respect to the effect sound output from the sound output means, when it is determined that the sound crack has occurred in the effect sound, the game situation is changed in each case. It is possible to reduce the amplification factor of the sound signal in the amplifying means at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to preferably eliminate the occurrence of sound cracking. Furthermore, when a sound crack occurs in the effect sound, whether or not to eliminate the sound crack can be selectively used according to the game state or the like. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the game play depending on whether or not the sound crack is eliminated.

  As described above, it is possible to preferably eliminate the sound breakage that occurs in the effect sound output from the sound output unit, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect by utilizing the sound breakage.

Feature E2. The sound control means,
When the output of the excess signal is determined by the excess determination means, the amplification rate limiting means (sound light control) that reduces the amplification rate of the sound signal in the amplification means at a predetermined timing. The gaming machine according to feature E1, which has a function of executing the process of step S1710 in the sub MPU 142 of the device 72.

  According to the feature E2, when sound effects are broken, the sound volume of the effect sound is reduced at a predetermined timing. Therefore, sound cracking is continued until a timing suitable for the content of the effect sound and the game situation, and thereafter. , It becomes possible to eliminate the sound crack. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by eliminating the sound crack. On the other hand, the timing to eliminate the sound cracking of the effect sound is not always a constant timing with respect to the start of the sound cracking but different timing, so that it is possible to increase the expectation for the jackpot during the game. Become.

Feature E3. The sound control means,
Specific effect determination means (a function of executing the process of step S1709 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72) that determines whether or not to perform a specific effect (sound break effect) based on the effect sound output from the sound output means. ,
When the output of the excess signal is determined by the excess determination unit, before the amplification factor is reduced by the amplification factor limiting unit on the condition that the specific production determination unit determines that the specific production is performed. , A gain holding unit (a function of executing the process of step S1718 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72) that holds the gain for a predetermined holding period (production sound breaking period La) without reducing the gain. The gaming machine described in the feature E2.

  According to the feature E3, when the specific effect is performed by the sound breakage generated in the effect sound, even if the sound breakage occurs in the effect sound, the sound breakup is not immediately eliminated, but the sound breakup is caused to some extent ( By continuing the period (only for the holding period), it is possible to differentiate from the case where the specific effect is not performed. In this case, since sound cracking continues, the degree of expectation for a jackpot or the like can be increased as compared with the case where sound cracking does not continue. That is, it is possible to utilize the phenomenon of sound cracking, which would otherwise give the player an unpleasant sensation, in order to enhance the effect.

  Here, sound cracking is considered to occur due to distortion in the waveform of the sound signal, and therefore, there are cases in which sound breaking occurs even in the case of effect sounds formed from one sound data, and cases in which sound breaking does not occur. And, the waveform of the sound output from the sound output means is different. That is, one sound data is used to output a plurality of types of effect sounds having different timbres. In this case, the types of effect sounds output from the sound output means are increased without increasing the sound data stored in the storage means, so that the effect sounds can be generated without increasing the capacity of the storage means. It is possible to achieve diversification, which in turn enhances the effect of the effect sound.

Feature E4. The sound control means,
In the state where the amplification factor is limited by the amplification factor limiting unit, when the specific production determination unit determines that the specific production is not performed, the state where the amplification factor is limited is the non-production limitation. Non-production canceling means for canceling the limitation of the amplification rate by the amplification rate limiting means after continuing for a period (normal production period) (function of executing the process of step S1912 in the sub MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72) When,
In the state where the amplification factor is limited by the amplification factor limiting device, when the specific production determination unit determines that the specific production is performed, the state where the amplification factor is limited is the non-production limitation. A production-use canceling means (step in the sub-MPU 142 of the sound/light control device 72) for canceling the limitation of the amplification rate by the amplification rate limiting means after continuing the production-use limitation period (production limitation period Lb) shorter than the period. Function for executing the processing of S1905),
The gaming machine according to feature E3, which has:

  According to the feature E4, when the specific effect due to the sound crack is not performed, the sound volume is continued for a relatively long period, so that the sound crack can be prevented from occurring again at the timing when the sound volume restriction is released. .. In this case, since it is unlikely that the volume limitation is repeatedly executed and released, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of sound breakage in the effect sound.

  On the other hand, when the specific effect due to sound cracking is performed, since the duration of the sound volume restriction is relatively short, it is possible to make the sound cracking likely to occur again by canceling the sound volume restriction. In this case, it is easy for the player to perceive that the repetition is intentional, because the repetition of execution and cancellation of the volume limitation is likely to occur. That is, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the player can easily recognize that the specific effect due to the sound break is being performed.

  Feature E5. When the specific effect is performed during game play, the holding period in which the amplification factor holding means holds the amplification factor without decreasing it and the effect release means continue the state in which the amplification factor is limited. The gaming machine according to feature E4, wherein the total with the effect-restricted period is set to be less than 1/2 of a required period required for one game time.

  According to the feature E5, since it is possible to repeatedly perform the execution and the cancellation of the volume limit in one game time, the player further recognizes that the specific effect due to the sound crack is being performed. Easier to do.

  It should be noted that one game time is from the start of the variable display of the pattern by the pattern display device to the display of the stop result of the variable display.

  Feature E6. If the specific effect is performed during the game time and the amplification rate is limited by the amplification rate limiting means, the production time is ended by the effect releasing means and the non-effect releasing means. The gaming machine according to the feature E4 or E5, wherein the limitation of the amplification rate by the amplification rate limiting means is released at a timing.

  According to the feature E6, it is possible to prevent the specific effect using sound cracking from being continuously performed after the game time is over. In this case, the effect sound can be differentiated depending on the specific effect, whether the game is being played or not. Therefore, the expectation during the game play can be appropriately increased by the specific effect.

Feature E7. A pattern display device (pattern display device 41) for performing variable display of a plurality of types of patterns;
When the variation start condition of the plurality of types of patterns is satisfied, the variation display of the plurality of types of patterns is started, and the stop result is displayed after the variation display is performed according to a preset variation mode. Display control means (display control device 128) for controlling the display of
Equipped with
In the amplification factor holding means, when the output of the excess signal is determined by the excess determination means, and when it is determined that the specific effect is performed by the specific effect determination means, the variable display is displayed on the pattern display device. The gaming machine according to any one of features E3 to E6, characterized in that the amplification factor is held for a holding period without being reduced, provided that it is performed.

  According to the characteristic E7, in a situation where the sound crack is generated in the effect sound while the variable display of the pattern is being performed, the sound crack is quickly eliminated, and the sound crack is not immediately eliminated to some extent. It is possible to differentiate the manner in which the sound crack occurs from the case where the problem is solved after continuing. In particular, while the variable display is being performed, it is the timing when the player expects the stop result of the variable display, and the expectation of the player can be further increased by the specific effect utilizing the sound break. ..

Feature E8. In the mode of variable display displayed on the pattern display device, other patterns except the final stop pattern among the respective patterns in which the combination of the patterns determined to give the player a privilege may be established, Includes a reach variation display that variably displays the final stop pattern under the condition that the variability display is started and then stopped.
When the output of the excess signal is determined by the excess determination unit and the specific effect determination unit determines that the specific effect is to be performed, the amplification factor holding unit displays the reach variation display on the pattern display device. The gaming machine according to feature E7, characterized in that the amplification factor is held for a holding period without being reduced, provided that the above condition is performed.

  Since the reach variation display has a higher degree of expectation of the stop result than the other variation displays, a specific effect using sound breakage should be performed when the reach variation display is performed, as in feature E6. Is effective in enhancing playability. Moreover, even in the case of reach variation display in the same mode, since it is differentiated between the case where the specific effect due to the sound break is performed and the case where it is not performed, the effect effect during the reach variable display is further enhanced. Can be increased.

Feature E9. The form of the reach variation display includes a first reach variation display (normal reach A, B) and a second reach variation display (super reach A to C) having a variation display period longer than the first reach variation display. Is
When the output of the excess signal is determined by the excess determination unit and the specific effect determination unit determines that the specific effect is to be performed, the amplification factor holding unit is configured to perform the second reach on the pattern display device. The gaming machine according to feature E8, characterized in that the amplification factor is held for the holding period without being reduced, provided that the variable display is being performed.

  Since the second reach variation display has a higher degree of expectation of the stop result than the first reach variation display, the feature using the sound cracking is displayed when the second reach variation display is performed, as in feature E9. The performance is effective in enhancing the game playability. Moreover, even with the second reach variation display of the same aspect, since it is differentiated between the case where the specific effect due to the sound break is performed and the case where it is not performed, the second reach variation display is being performed. The staging effect can be further enhanced.

  The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in the area, and gives a bonus to the player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

  Spinning machine such as slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means In addition, or after a lapse of a predetermined time, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped, and a gaming machine that gives a privilege to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

  10... Pachinko machine as gaming machine, 13... Inner frame as gaming machine main body, 14... Front door frame as gaming machine front body, 71... Main control device as main control means, 72... Sound having sound control means Light control device, 87... Common ROM as storage means, 91... Upper speaker as sound output means and upper sound output means, 101... Lower speaker as sound output means and lower sound output means, 111... Operating means Volume switch as 112, operation knob as variable operation unit, 135 as speaker path as sound output path, 142 as sub MPU as sound control means and sub-control means, 171, amplifier as amplification means, 175... level Sound crack detection circuit as excess detection circuit, 176... Branch path, 182... Peak hold section as peak holding means, 183... Reset means, 191... Hold capacitor, 192... Diode as rectifying element, 193... Buffer section, 194 ... operational amplifier, 201... voltage generation section, 202... comparator as comparison means, 203... shunt regulator, 211... discharge section, 214... changeover switch, 217... oscillation circuit as reset execution means, R1... first resistance, R2... A second resistor as a variable resistor that constitutes the variable setting means.

Claims (1)

Amplification means for amplifying the sound signal,
Sound output means for outputting a sound at a volume according to the volume level of the sound signal amplified by the amplification means,
Sound excess detection means capable of detecting that the volume level of the sound signal amplified by the amplification means exceeds a predetermined reference level,
Setting means capable of setting a predetermined set value from a plurality of predetermined values,
Reduction means for performing a level reduction process for reducing the volume level of the sound signal based on the detection of the oversound detection means,
A gaming machine equipped with
The reducing unit has an amplification factor limiting unit that reduces the amplification factor of the sound signal amplified by the amplification unit according to the setting of the setting unit,
The gaming machine is provided with a plurality of the sound output means, and the sound excess detection means corresponding to each of the sound output means.

Images